Home

Quantum with Unity Pro - Maintenance

1. Presentation Function The DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink module accepts 125 VDC inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential The module has software selectable response time to provide additional input filtering Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 673 00 module and its components O Dow 6 2 o IR l Omna Stu WA E 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 208 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 673 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 673 00 module Active 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 21 6 14 22 7 15 23 8 16 24 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 673 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 24 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 209 140 DDI 673 00 Wirin
2. Presentation Function The Analog RTD Input 8 Channel module accepts input from up to eight 2 3 and 4 wire RTD sensors and provides temperature measurement data to the Quantum CPU Illustration The following figure shows the 140 ARI 030 10 module and its components O ser 6 27 Omna NEU Y o eu 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 80 35010516 05 2010 140 ARI 030 10 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ARI 030 10 module 1 1 2 2 3 38 4 4 5 5 6 6 of 8 8 Description The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ARI 030 10 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected R Module has passed power up diagnostics 1 8 Red There is a detected error on the indicated point or channel This includes broken wire and short circuit conditions Diagnos
3. Presentation Function The DC Input 24 VDC 2x8 Sink DC Output 24 VDC 2x4 Source module accepts and switches 24 VDC inputs outputs and is for use with sink input and source output devices Illustration This section contains a photograph of the front panel of the 140 DDM 390 00 module The following figure shows the I O module and its components 6 2 1 o erp NU Y Bo 2 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 474 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 390 00 Indicators Version Label Figure The following figure shows the location of the version label DC IN OUT 24V 16 8 SINK SOURCE PV 00 RL 77 SV __ 140 DDM 390 00 DC IN OUT Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDM 390 00 module Active NONA WON 400 ON m M Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDM 390 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communicat
4. Presentation Function The Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open module is used to switch a voltage source using 16 relays with normally open contacts Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DRA 840 00 module and its components 2 See 6 2 o IR Omn NEU o N 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 442 35010516 05 2010 140 DRA 840 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DRA 840 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fa 8 Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 oak OWN The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DRA 84000 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 443 140 DRA 840 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DRA 840 00 wiring diagram RELAY 14 COMMON S
5. Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door ouhWhd 518 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 All 330 00 module Active Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 All 330 00 module LEDs Color Indication When On Active Green Communicating with the PLC F Red A broken wire 4 20 mA only out of range condition or short circuit on any channel 1 8 A broken wire out of range condition or short circuit on the indicated channel 35010516 05 2010 519 140 AII 330 00 Wiring Diagrams Cenelec Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module configured with an RTD Resistance connection CENELEC CERTIFICATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION Entity Parameters NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION 1 Group IIA IIB IIC Vo 15 5 Vdc lo 276 much e eee eg Po 1 07 Wich SEE NOTE 1 Co 0 508 microf ch Lo 466 microH ch 4 Wire RTD Resistor Source 1 Connection V Sense 1
6. IS AN IN Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD 9 51W 3x INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 10 TASK MAST M MODULE INPUT HTD Resistance v MODULE RESOLUTION 1 0 Deg z OUTPUT UNIT Centigrade M VALUE TYPE Temp M CHANNELS E CHANNEL 1 DISABLE No Y WIRE 4 wire Pt 100 200 to 850 v CHANNEL2 gt CHANNEL3 CHANNEL4 CHANNEL5 CHANNEL6 CHANNEL CHANNEL8 11 Local 2 140 All 35010516 05 2010 535 140 AII 330 00 Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 Address Inputs Ending 10 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module in AUXO module in other than other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Module Input RTD Resistance TC mV for Module Input TC mV see Parameter and Default values TC page 537 Module Resolution 1 0 Deg 0 1 Deg Output Unit Centigrade Fahrenheit Value Type Temp Raw Value Channel1 Disable No Yes Wire 4 wire 2 wire 3 wire Type Pt 100 200 to 850 Pt 200 200 to 850 Pt 500 200 to 850 Pt 1000 200 to 850 Ni 100 200 to 850 Ni 200 200 to 850 Ni 500 200 to 850 Ni 1000 200 to 850 R 0 to 766 66 ohms R 0 to 4000 ohms Apt 100 100 to 450 ohms Apt
7. Jumper INPUT Ok INPUT 4 OH SENSE Sire INPUT INPUT 9 SENSE 2 NIC NIC N C tage INPUT 3 D INPUT J source NIC LSENSE INPUT INPUT a 1 SENSE N C NIC INPUT INPUT on 6 1 SENSE INPUT e mE amp SENSE N C NIC G gt G INPUT N C AH SENSE INPUT INPUT N C D 1 SENSE Nic Nic External Wiring Recommendation 1 The user supplies the current and voltage sources installation and calibration of fuses are at the discretion of the user 2 Use shielded signal cable In noisy environnements twisted shielded cable is recommended 3 Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC s ground 4 A Shield Bar STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010 3020 should be used to connect the shielded cable to ground see Quantum with Unity Pro Hardware Reference Manual 5 Not connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 109 140 AVI 030 00 Specifications General Specifications Operating Ranges Voltage Input General Specifications Module Type 8 Channel IN Differential External Power Not required Operating Voltage Channel to 200 VDC Channel 135 VAC rms max Bus Current required Module 280 mA Power Diss
8. Gm Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label oa hWnd 140 35010516 05 2010 140 AVO 020 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AVO 020 00 module Active 4 2 3 4 Diagnostic During normal operation the front panel Active and 1 4 green LEDs are ON If bus communication to the module stops for any reason the Active LED will go off and output values are set depending on panel software configuration e When LEDs 1 4 are ON the channel output levels will be as predetermined and held by the module e When LEDs 1 4 are OFF the master override levels are output on each channel 35010516 05 2010 141 140 AVO 020 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Before removing the connector remove the field power or ensure that pre actuator wiring can remain in an open circuit condition Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATI
9. schematic Power Current Supply gt _ gt _ Power L Input Lr G 4 Output YW v C Common Load Current s J 35010516 05 2010 471 General Information Discrete I O True Low Figure The following figure shows true low current source input current sink output schematic Power Supply T Input e 8 Current OUO QT Current Sinking Power Current Supply Load Output Common This describes a physical implementation of the I O hardware which when in the true state sinks current from the external load Current Sourcing This describes a physical implementation of the I O hardware which when in the true state sources current to the external load 472 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 390 00 24 VDC 2x8 Sink IN 2x4 Source OUT Module 48 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDM 390 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 474 Indicators 475 RIO Drop Location 476 Wiring Diagram 477 Specifications 479 Maintenance 481 140 DDM 390 00 Parameter Configuration 483 35010516 05 2010 473 140 DDM 390 00
10. SAFETY DC IN 24V 16x1 F Overview Config 10 Objects Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD IW 3X INPUT STARTING ADDRESS 1 i INPUT ENDING ADDRESS 7 INPUT TYPE BINARY Y _ MAST MAX CONSECUTIVE CRC ERROR 1 Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3x Input Starting Address 1 Depends on the number of Input Ending Address 7 modules Input Type BINARY Task MAST Max Consecutive CRC 1 Define the number of Error communication errors necessary to declare the module unhealthy 612 35010516 05 2010 140 SDO 953 00S Digital OUT Module 60 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 SDO 953 00S module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 614 Indicators 615 Wiring Diagram 616 Specifications 618 Addressing 620 Parameter Configuration 626 35010516 05 2010 613 140 SDO 953 00S Presentation Function 24 VDC 0 5 A Source overload detection 16 channel Digital Output module NOTE If an error is detected during power up self tests the module is unable to start any communication with the host until the error disappears If the 24 V external power supply is not connected to the module an error is detected on the channels and the module will not start Illustration Th
11. amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp 9 e e e 9 665 65 6 amp amp 6558 G9 C9 C9 9 9 INPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON INPUT 17 INPUT 19 INPUT 21 INPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON INPUT 25 INPUT 27 INPUT 29 INPUT 31 GROUP D COMMON NOTE N C Not Connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG INPUT 1 o7 e Tm i INPUT 3 547 e INPUT 5 o o e INPUT 7 c 5 e GROUP A COMMON INPUT 9 INPUT 11 uris 2 FIELD DEVICE 184 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 353 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 IN 4 groups x 8 points Logic True High External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 1 7 W 0 36 W x the number of points ON Bus Current Required 330 mA map 2 input words Fault Detection None Isolation Isolation Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Fuses Fuses Internal Not required External User installed per local and national electrical codes Input Rating Input Rating ON Level voltage 15 30 VDC OFF Level voltage 3 5 VDC ON Level current 2 0 mA min OFF Level current 0 5 mA max
12. 430 Chapter 43 140 DAO 853 00 230 VAC 4x8 Source OUT Module 431 Presentation se Eug aie eae aged d RE EG AG oO EPS 432 Indicators oie iu EROR Meare edie tech be bee etek poe 4338 Wiring Diagram sss 434 Specifications 2 en peers era tuis eee uci eA ep dae ee 436 Maintenance fst kins tue Eten rg dew dpt Ree ink ees ad ae 439 140 DAO 853 00 Parameter 440 35010516 05 2010 11 Chapter 44 140 DRA 840 00 Relay 16x1 Normally Open OUT 441 Presentation aas aa aaa a Aana ERROR 442 lridicatorSzs x n a O RPE ER Ae ee eS 443 Wiring Diagram 444 Specifications 2 2 osie cans AAE eke E EAT eG Ped R aia 445 140 DRA 840 00 Parameter Configuration 447 Chapter 45 140 DRC 830 00 Relay 8x1 Normally Open Normally Closed OUT 449 Presentations fate vies aoe Eterna ub e BUR RUD de 450 Indicators ae Eds Pete 451 Wiring Diagram mesit dee p RED DE el Ria CRX Dia eet 452 Specifications secre ete nee eae A ed 453 140 DRC 830 00 Parameter Configuration 456 Chapter 46 140 DVO 853 00 10 30 VDC 32x1 Verified OUT Module 5i ak ERE XG een EXEAT au 457 Presentation
13. 96 Point Output Module The 96 point output module is e 140DDO36400 DC out 24VDC 6x16 Source Flat Addressing The following figures show the words 1 through 6 format for the 14000036400 output module For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB First Word Output Point 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 MSB Second Word Output 47 48 49 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Point 17 MSB Third Word Output Point 33 3 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 MSB Fourth Word Output 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Point 49 MSB Fifth Word Output 65 leo 67 68 69 70 71 72 7 74 75 76 77 T8 79 80 Point 65 MSB Sixth Word Output g4 83 84 85 86 87 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 Point 81 85010516 05 2010 47 Addressing Modes Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 16 Point Output Modules Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point V O Object Comment Output 1 9eQ Wo eVr m 1 Value Output 2 9eQ Wb eVr m 2 Value Output 95 9eQ WVo eVr m 95 Value Output 96 Q b e r m 96 Value
14. AN OUT 4CH CURR Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD MW 4x OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 4 MAST CHANNELS CHANNEL1 LAST VALUE m TIMEOUT VALUE 0 bai CHANNEL2 LAST VALUE CHANNELS LAST VALUE v CHANNEL4 LAST VALUE v 11 Local QU 2 140 ACG Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD MW 4X Outputs Starting 1 Address Outputs Ending 4 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in Grayed if module in AUXO other than local other than local AUX1 AUX2 AUXS Channels Channel LAST VALUE DISABLED 1 USER DEFINED Timeout Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Channel USER DEFINED Channel2 Channel4 see Channel Legend 1 Configuring any channel as DISABLED will cause all channels to be disabled current 0 when a communication loss occurs Selecting DISABLED for any channel causes all others to default to that state Output will be what is connected to the module master override terminals either common or an external voltage Output LEDs 1 4 will go out when DISABLED is selected and the module goes to the inactive state 35010516 05 2010 127 140 ACO 020 00 128 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 130 00 Analog Mixed Current OUT Module 10 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 ACO 130 00 modul
15. Presentation Function The AC Input 48 VAC 16x1 module accepts 48 VAC inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 440 00 module and its components E 6 2 1 _ er NEU A 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 248 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 440 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 440 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 440 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 249 140 DAI 440 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 440 00 wiring diagram RETURN 1 RETURN 2 RETURN 3 RETURN 4 N C RETURN 5 RETURN 6 RETURN 7 RETURN 8 N C RETURN 9 RETURN 10 RETURN 11 RETURN 12 NIC RETURN 13 RETURN 14 RETURN 15 RETURN 16 NIC NPUT 1
16. 1 Source 2 V Sense 2 1 Source 3 V Sense 3 oge N C Source 4 TORES 0 uL m ou ea nce wee te SEE NOTE 1 V Sense 4 2 Wire RTD Resistor Connection 1 Source 5 V Sense 5 Chassis Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair Ground cables should be used for connec lions Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Nic 1 Source 6 V Sense 6 1 Source 7 V Sense 7 N C ISure8 j 4 SEE NOTE 1 V Sense 8 3 Wire RTD Resistor Connection 1 5 Module All 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip Note 2 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to Chassis the module Ground 520 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a Thermocouple connection CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Parameters per Channel Vo 15 5 Vdc lo 276 mA ch Po 1 07 Wich 0 508 uF ch Lo 466 uH ch NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION LOCATION GROUP IIA IIB IIC m L See Note 1 1 Source 1 CD Source 1 V Sense 1 V Sense 1 I Source 2 Thermocouple Type J K E LR 5 See Note 2 Chassis V Se
17. 35010516 05 2010 401 140 DAO 840 10 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 10 wiring diagram N 5A fuse aw OUTPUT 1 LINE amp 66 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 OUTPUT 2 LINE OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 LINE OUTPUT 3 INDUCTIVE OUTPUT 4 LINE OUTPUT 4 NIC N C OUTPUT 5 LINE OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 LINE OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 LINE OUTPUT 7 Output protection example see note OUTPUT 8 LINE OUTPUT 8 N C OUTPUT 9 N C OUTPUT 9 LINE amp C6 9 O 9 O 9 9 Oo OUTPUT 10 LINE OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 11 LINE OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 LINE OUTPUT 12 N C OUTPUT 13 N C OUTPUT 13 LINE OUTPUT 14 LINE OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 15 LINE OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 16 LINE OUTPUT 16 N C 6 66 66 6 66 6 6 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 Not Connected 3 When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 402 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 840 10 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to
18. See Note LOAD SOURCE ic S 2 See Note N RELAY 2 COMMON G NIC 9 NIC ESAR 02 O OUTPUT 3 RELAY 3 COMMON 3 PUT3 NIC OUTPUTS __ RELAY 4 COMMON 17 OUTPUT 4 NIC NIC OUTPUT 5 G2 27 RELAY 5 COMMON G3 OUTPUT 5 NIC 5 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT X RELAY 6 COMMON OUTPUT 6 E d NIC NG Bum wc Ga 6v Output x RELAY COMMON 34 63 OUTPUT 7 TY NIC 65 OUTPUT 8 RELAY 8 COMMON 67 OUTPUT 8 One of Eight Typical NIC NIC Notes on Wiring Diagram e When switching DC voltages it is recommended that the source be connected to the common pin and the load be connected to the N O or N C contact e For 125 VDC inductive loads external clamping is recommended to extend relay contact life 1N 4004 or equivalent e N C Not Connected e N O Normally Open e N C Normally Closed NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 452 35010516 05 2010 140 DRC 830 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 8 OUT normaly open External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 2 75 W 0 5 W x input points ON Bus Current required Module 560 mA map 0 5 output word Operating Voltage Operating Voltage AC 20 250 VAC DC
19. 35010516 05 2010 23 Module Configuration 24 35010516 05 2010 Quantum Addressing Modes Purpose This chapter provides information on the three different modes Unity Pro allows to address the I O data from a Quantum I O module e Flat Addressing e Topological Addressing e IODDT Addressing NOTE Topological addresses overlapping V6IWr m c is not supported by Quantum application use flat addressing lWx when memory overlapping control is needed NOTE The different addressing modes refer to the same physical location in the PLC memory for a given data point While Flat Addressing and Topological Addressing are available for all Quantum I O modules IODDTs are only provided for modules that deliver information in addition to the I O values e g errors or warnings Also provided is information about I O module status bytes and bit order What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Flat Addressing 800 Series I O Modules 26 Topological Addressing 800 Series I O Modules with Unity 27 IODDT Addressing 28 Quantum IODDTs 29 Addressing Example 31 Discrete I O Bit Numbering 32 Module Status Byte 33 Configuration for Discrete Input Modules 36 Configuration for Discrete Output Modules 42 Configuration for Discrete Input Output Modules 49 35010516 05 2010 25 Addressing Modes Flat A
20. Name Default Value Options Description Mapping 1 1 0 WORD MW 4X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 31 2 Address Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 31 2 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Output Shutdown DISABLE FAILE STATES State Automatic Restart No Yes Group 1 Status Input VERIFIED HEALTH VERIFIED FAULT INPUT ONLY ACTUAL Fail States DISABLE LAST VALUE USER DEFINED User Defined 0 0 255 only enabled if Fail States USER DEFINED Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 see Group 1 140 DVO 853 00 468 35010516 05 2010 Discrete IN OUT Modules VII Introduction The following part provides information on the Quantum Discrete IN OUT modules What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 47 General Information 471 48 140 DDM 390 00 24 VDC 2x8 Sink IN 2x4 Source OUT 473 Module 49 140 DDM 690 00 125 VDC High Power IN OUT Module 485 50 140 DAM 590 00 115 VAC 2x8 IN 2x4 OUT Module 497 35010516 05 2010 469 Discrete IN OUT Modules 470 35010516 05 2010 General Information 47 Discrete I O Logic Circuits Discrete I O True High Figure The following figure shows true high current sink input current source output
21. Presentation Function The Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open Normally Closed module is used to switch voltage sources using eight relays with normally open and normally closed contacts Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DRC 830 00 module and its components 2 Sn 6 2 IR Omn p NEU o N 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 450 35010516 05 2010 140 DRC 830 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DRC 830 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DRC 830 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 8 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 451 140 DRC 830 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DRC 830 00 wiring diagram
22. INPUT 16 _ ee INPUT GROUP B COMMON NIC 9 eee Ge amp amp amp amp 5 amp amp amp amp amp amp amp C 9 amp C C9 1 N C Not Connected 2 When field wiring the I O modules the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 477 140 DDM 390 00 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e Disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 4 CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 1 25 A fuse Littlefuse 3121 25 1 25 A 250 V Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 478 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 390 00 Specifications General Specifications Input Rating General Specifications Module Type 16 IN 2 groups x 8 points 8 OUT 2 groups x 4 points External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 1 75 W 0 36 x input points ON 1 1 V x total outputs load Currents Bus Current required Module 330 mA map 1 input word 0 5 output w
23. Presentation Indicators Wiring Diagram Specifications Parameter Configuration 140 DDI 353 00 24 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module Presentation Indicators Wiring Diagram Specifications Parameter Configuration 140 DDI 353 10 24 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module Presentation Indicators Wiring Diagram Specifications Parameter Configuration 140 DDI 364 00 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast IN Module Presentation Indicators Color Codes Specifications Parameter Configuration 139 140 141 142 145 147 148 151 153 154 155 156 159 163 166 169 171 171 173 174 175 176 177 179 181 182 183 184 185 187 189 190 191 192 193 195 197 198 201 202 203 205 35010516 05 2010 Chapter 18 140 DDI 673 00 125 VDC 3x8 Sink IN Module 207 Presentation utor RR Reiten dee T eur as 208 Indicators ue i esp Ue Ed Dean Ea wea E a 209 Wiring Diagram yan asd td het Gum EXHI AU ES 210 Specifications ence eee ru he E a ee AE 211 Parameter Configuration 214 Chapter 19 140 DDI 841 00 10 60 VDC 8x2 Sink IN Module 215 Presentation zc rete RE BS ESPERE E ales 216 IndiCators hin ete edhe ash one ERE any wad ev 217 Wiring Diagram xe ete E ete 218
24. Accuracy Error 25 degrees C Input range Typical Absolute Maximum Absolute error Error 10 VDC 5 VDC 6 mV 10 mV 0 10 VDC 0 5 VDC 1 15VDC 3 mV 5 mV 20 48 64 0 20 4 20 24 uA 32 uA Isolation Channel to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute 750 VDC rms for 1 minute NOTE Calibration is not required for this module 35010516 05 2010 111 140 AVI 030 00 Linear Measuring Ranges Table The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140 AVI 030 00 Analog Input Module Data Format Input Under Range Normal Over Range 16 bit Format 10V 768 768 64 768 gt 64 768 5 20 mA lt 16 768 16 768 48 768 gt 48 768 0 10V 0 64 000 64 000 0 5V 0 20mA 0 32 000 gt 32 000 1 5V 4 20mA 6 400 6 400 32 000 32 000 Voltmeter Format 10V 10 000 10 000 10 000 gt 10 000 5 V 20 mA lt 5 000 5 000 5 000 5 000 0 10V 10 000 10 000 0 5V 0 20mA 0 5 000 5 000 1 5V 4 20mA 1 000 1 000 5 000 5 000 12 bit Format 10 V 0 0 4 095 4 095 5 20 mA 0 0 4 095 4 095 0 10V 0 4 095 4 095 0 5V 0 20mA 0 4 095 4 095 1 5V 4 20mA 0 0 4 095 4 095 The Voltmeter ranges are listed in Modsoft signed form
25. 21 22 23 24 Topological Addressing I O Map Status Byte The following tables show the topological addresses for the 24 Point Input Modules Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point V O Object Comment Input 1 9el No eV r m 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 Value Input 23 lf b e r m 23 Value Input 24 l b e r m 24 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point V O Object Comment Inputword 1 IW b e r m 1 1 Value Inputword 2 9elW W5o eVr m 1 2 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot There is no input I O map status byte associated with this module 38 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes 32 Point Input Modules Flat Addressing The 32 point input modules are as follows 140 DAI 353 00 AC Input 24 Vac 4x8 140 DAI 453 00 AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 140 DAI 553 00 AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 140 DAI 753 00 AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 140 DDI 153 10 DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source 140 DDI 353 00 DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink 140 DDI 353 10 DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Source 140 DDI 853 00 DC Input 10 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink For addressing information of the 140 DSI 353 00 please refer to Addressing page 309 The input modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous discrete input references or as two contiguous IW input words in the following format
26. 35010516 05 2010 223 140 DDI 853 00 Presentation Function The DC Input 10 60 VDC 4x8 Sink module accepts 10 60 VDC inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential ON OFF levels are dependent on the reference voltage selected Different reference voltages may be used for different groups Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 853 00 module and its components w 001255 00 Gm Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label ouhWhnhd 224 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 853 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 853 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 853 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned
27. Continuous 56 VAC 10s 63 VAC 1 Cycle 100 VAC Response Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes NOTE Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 440 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AC IN 48V 2x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT l 1X INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 EB p BINARY M TASK MAST 11 2 140 DAIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 16 1 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 253 140 DAI 440 00 254 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 453 00 48 VAC 4x8 IN Module 24 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 453 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 256 Indicators 257 Wiring Diagram 258 Specifications 259 Paramete
28. GROUP D COMMON Du aut ne Note When driving a load from two different points a blocking diode is required for each point These di odes shown above will help prevent incorrect sta tus indications when only one of the points is com manded ON NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 460 35010516 05 2010 140 DVO 853 00 Specifications General Specifications Voltage General Specifications Module Type 32 OUT 4 groups x 8 points External Power 10 30 VDC Power Dissipation 2 5W 0 1 Wx input points ON 0 4 V x total load Currents Bus Current required Module 500 mA map 2 input word 2 output word Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of field power incorrect output state Voltage Operating Voltage max 10 30 VDC Absolute Voltage max 50 VDC for 1 0 ms decaying voltage pulse ON State Drop Point 0 4 VDC 0 5A Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point Each Group 4 0A Per Module 16A OFF State Leakage Point 0 4 mA 30 VDC Surge Current max Each Point 2 5 A 1 ms duration no more than 6 per minute 35010516 05 2010 461 140 DVO 853 00 Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance Capacit
29. 10s 156 VAC 1 Cycle 200 VAC Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 20 132 VAC ON State Drop Point 1 5 VAC Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point 4 0 A continuous 20 132 VAC rms Any four contiguous Points 4 0 A max continuous for the sum of the four points Per Module 16 A continuous see the chart below 404 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 840 10 The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 10 operating curve DAO 840 10 Operating Curve N 16 15 14 N 13 X z 12 E d 40 5 o N 2 2 8 N 20 132 V rms 3j 7 9 6 5 5 4 2 3 2 1 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Frequency and Minimum Load Current Frequency 47 63 Hz Minimum Load Current 5mA OFF State Leakage Point max OFF State Leakage Point max OFF State Leakage Point max 2 5 mA 230 VAC 2mA 115 VAC 1 mA 48 VAC 1 mA 24 VAC Surge Current max rms Surge Current max rms One Cycle 30 A per point Two Cycles 20 A per point Three Cycles 10 A per point Applied dV dT 400 V us 35010516 05 2010 405 140 DAO 840 10 Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Output to Output 1500 VAC rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
30. 414 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 10 The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 10 Operating Curve DAO 842 10 Operating Curve k DN N UM W DN S e E T e 7 o K N 20 132 V rms N N 170 253 V rms TOTAL MODULE CURRENT NO RO A 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C The specifications stated are pending UL CSA approval This module was originally approved at 2 A each point and 12 A 0 50 C 115 VAC and 0 50 C 230 VAC per module Frequency and Minimum Load Current Frequency 47 63 Hz Minimum Load Current 5 mA OFF State Leakage Point max OFF State Leakage Point max OFF State Leakage Point max 2 5 mA 230 VAC 2 mA 115 VAC Surge Current max rms Surge Current max rms One Cycle 30 A per point 45 A per group Two Cycles 20 A per point 30 A per group 35010516 05 2010 415 140 DAO 842 10 Three Cycles 10 A per point 25 A per group Applied dV dT 400 V us Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group 1000 VAC rms for 1 minute galvanically isolated Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection internal RC snubber suppression Response Response OFF
31. 69 Gs OUTPUT 16 LINE OUTPUT 16 69 6 NC 0 NIC 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 Not Connected 3 Voltages up 133V may be different phases adjacent output points 4 Voltages over 133V of different phases must have an output point separation between them For example Output 1 and 2 Phase A Skip Output 3 Output 4 Phase B 5 When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 392 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 840 00 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Protect each output point with an external fuse Schneider Electric recommends a 5 A fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87 Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 4 CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS e Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common single phase AC power source e Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output Use an ex
32. CHANNEL4 LAST VALUE Y qgl LocalQj 2 140 AVG 148 35010516 05 2010 140 AVO 020 00 Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD MW 4X Outputs Starting 1 Address Outputs Ending 4 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to Grayed if module in AUXO MAST if other than local AUX1 module in AUX2 other than AUXS local Channels Channel1 LAST VALUE DISABLED 1 USER DEFINED Timeout Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Channel US ER DEFINED Channel2 Channel4 LAST VALUE DISABLED 1 USER DEFINED Legend 1 Configuring any channel as DISABLED will cause all channels to be disabled current 0 when a communication loss occurs Selecting DISABLED for any channel causes all others to default to that state Output will be what is connected to the module master override terminals either common or an external voltage Output LEDs 1 4 will go out when DISABLED is selected and the module goes to the inactive state 35010516 05 2010 149 140 AVO 020 00 150 35010516 05 2010 Analog IN OUT Modules IV 35010516 05 2010 151 Analog IN OUT Modules 152 35010516 05 2010 140 AMM 090 00 Analog Mixed Current Voltage IN OUT Module 12 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AMM 090 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the f
33. Wiring Practices Safe Area Wiring Practices Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring This can be accomplished by the following methods e Separate blue wire ducts raceways or conduits e Grounded metal or insulated partitions between the intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe wiring e Aseparation of two inches 50 mm of air space between the intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe wiring With this method the intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe wires must be tied down in separate bundles to maintain the required separation Identification and Labeling Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled Light blue color coding should be used for all intrinsically safe wiring The terminal strip wiring connector on all Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it from all non intrinsically safe modules All wire ducts raceways cable trays and open wiring must be labeled Intrinsically Safe Wiring with a maximum spacing of 25 feet between labels Wiring Type and Grounding Shielded twisted pair wires shall be used for each of the input or output pairs connected to the Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip The wire gauge size can be between AWG 20 and AWG 12 Each twisted pair wire shield must be connected to the ground screws
34. n KOK i SES Sh 20 132 V ms N 170 253 V rms TOTAL MODULE CURRENT A o NO 4 010 NO CO A 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C The specifications stated are pending UL CSA approval This module was originally approved at 2 A each point and 12 A 0 50 C 115 VAC and 0 50 C 230 VAC per module Frequency and Minimum Load Current Frequency and Minimum Load Current Frequency 47 63 Hz Minimum Load Current 5 OFF State Leakage Point max OFF State Leakage Point max OFF State Leakage Point max 2 5 mA 230 VAC 2 mA Q 115 VAC 1 mA 48 VAC 1 mA 24 VAC Surge Current max rms Surge Current max rms One Cycle 30 A per point Two Cycles 20 A per point Three Cycles 10 A per point Applied DV DT 400 V us 35010516 05 2010 395 140 DAO 840 00 Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Output to Output 1500 VAC rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection internal RC snubber suppression Response Response OFF ON 0 5 of one line cycle max ON OFF 0 5 of one line cycle max Fuses Fuses Internal None External Protect each output with an external 5 amp fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87 A CAUTION
35. INPUT 2 INPUT 1 INPUT 4 INPUT 3 QO INPUT 6 INPUT 5 INPUT 8 INPUT 7 g GROUP A SUPPLY NPUT 10 N C INPUT 9 NPUT 12 NPUT 14 NPUT 16 8 GROUP B SUPPLY NPUT 18 NPUT 20 NPUT 22 NPUT 24 GROUP C SUPPLY NPUT 26 NPUT 28 NPUT 30 NPUT 32 GROUP D SUPPLY 8 amp 8 amp amp 8 8 8 8 5 8 8 9 9 8 amp 8 amp amp 5 amp amp 6 amp amp G5 G5 8 9 C9 99 C NOTE N C Not Connected N C N C N C INPUT 11 INPUT 13 INPUT 15 INPUT 17 INPUT 19 INPUT 21 INPUT 23 INPUT 25 INPUT 27 INPUT 29 INPUT 31 FIELD DEVICE NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 192 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 353 10 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 IN 4 groups x 8 points Logic True Low External Power 19 2 30 VDC Power Dissipation 1 5 W 0 26 W x the number of points ON Bus Current required 330 mA max map 2 input words Fault Detection None Isolation Isolation Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Input Rating Input
36. input 15 input 16 common OV amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp 8 8 amp amp amp amp 9 9 C9 9 ODO MODULE power supply 24 VDC fuse 1 A fast blow fuse pull up resistor in sensor example 15 kOhms fuse input 1 sensor l 3 input 2 sensor 5 input 3 sensor 2 input 4 sensor 7 0 an input 5 sensor example ilc NOTE There is only one group of 16 inputs All common 24 V are internally connected and all common 0 V are also internally connected The two pins of a same input e g pin 1 and 2 for input 1 are internally connected too so that you can use either the right pin or the left one 35010516 05 2010 605 140 SDI 953 00S Understanding and Using Cut Wire Detection If the electrical current between the input and the sensor is more than 1 mA the wire is detected as not cut If this current is less than 1 mA the wire is detected as broken and the corresponding input s red LED is lit If you install dry contact sensors the corresponding input s red LED will be lit whenever the contact is open and the current will be at 0 mA To solve this and use cut wire detection properly Schneider Electric recommends installing a pull up resistor on the sensors so that the minimum current of 1 mA will be reached You can use a 15 kohms pull up resistor or work out the value you need See the sensor
37. 389 Presentation x ud us CREE mh he Dee EEG x 390 INGICALONS ette pore ui dys Oe RR enc Reed pactis 391 Wiring Diagram i niece Ine AE ee RR DET EE ug 392 Specifications REALI daa Tee dee Aue ea Lue 394 140 DAO 840 00 Parameter 397 Chapter 40 140 DAO 840 10 24 115 VAC 16x1 OUT Module 399 Presentation sepe ea el We CE ete a 400 Indicators sh he aes ie eee a ee E un AURA 401 Wiring Diagram RR III 402 Specifications s voii En RES 404 140 DAO 840 10 Parameter 407 Chapter 41 140 DAO 842 10 100 230 VAC 4x4 OUT Module 409 Presentation onus pe pene RECRe eue e Ere eRe 410 Indicators cz ee a Eee um pen ene i ER e 411 Wiring Diagram nee ee ERR EE Ix ea ate eee ld 412 Specifications ucro RI eee ea Pee ee E N ia 414 Maintenance i e ber Bie os a Dinas Saal Peery 417 140 DAO 842 10 Parameter 419 Chapter 42 140 DAO 842 20 24 48 VAC 4x4 OUT Module 421 Presentation sioe bee bias beds aha 422 Indicators vinos iat RR RIDERE Re Race te Se ea ian Atri a 423 Wiring Diagram 23 set in coed ME nee m Eno Mug 424 Specifications asta tases Wie hee de Eee tS ea 426 Maintenance mper pm ger E Up ee de baer Roe bi 429 140 DAO 842 20 Parameter
38. 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before mounting removing a discrete module Discrete Modules e remove the power to the module sensors and pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before mounting removing an analog module Analog Modules e make sure that the terminal block is still connected to the ground and e remove the power to the module sensors and pre actuators e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 35010516 05 2010 53 Discrete and Analog Modules Terminal Blocks General Rules for Installation 54 35010516 05 2010 Analog IN Modules Introduction What s in this Part The following part provides information on the Quantum Analog IN modules This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 4 140 ACI 030 00 Analog Current Voltage IN Module 57 5 140 ACI 040 00 Analog Mixed Current IN Module 69 6 140 ARI 030 10 Analog RTD IN Module 79 7 140 ATI 030 00 Analog TC IN Module 91 8 140 AVI 03
39. OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 5 A 250 V fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 396 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 840 00 140 DAO 840 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window AC OUT 24 230 16x1 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING M OX OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 TASK MAST Y BINARY M TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED M VALUE 0 ut Local Qy 2 140 DAG Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping M Ox WORD MW 4X Output Starting 1 1 Address Output Ending 16 1 Address Output Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State USERDEFINED 35010516 05 2010 397 140 DAO 840 00 398 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 840 10 24 115 VAC 16x1 OUT Module 40 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information of the Quantum 140 DAO 840 10 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 400 Indicators 401 Wiring Diagram 402 Specifications 404 140 DAO 840 10 Parameter Configuratio
40. Output 4 Monitor 4 NC Output 4 Note 2 More than one device NIC can be connected as long as they have differential input and NIC total input resistance is less than 500 ohms N C N C N C Output 5 N C Monitor 5 See Note 3 Note 3 The voltmeter is optional and reads voltage proportional to the current Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter Output 5 N C Output 6 Monitor 6 Output 6 N C Output 7 Note 4 Unused channels will show open loop unless outputs are shorted as shown for 8 Monitor 7 Output 7 N C Output 8 Monitor 8 Note 5 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically Output 8 4 connected to the module Note 6 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes 1 5 Module AIO 330 00 should be used for mounting Blue Terminal Strip this module 140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram 31001364 Rev 00 554 35010516 05 2010 140 AIO 330 00 FM Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module Notes Related to FM Certification Voc 29 5 VDC Isc 94 mA Ch Ca 68 nf Ch La 4 2 mH Ch Po 520 mW Ch This IS field device should meet Note 7 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 6 appropriate for connection with IS RTD TC IN Module wi
41. channel L S 24 V dc No Load 279V _ _ SeeNotes 1 amp 2 lj 119 MA C 84 nf S FIELD La 1 0 mH DEVICE Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area volt output 10 20 output age must not exceed 250 V aka A Note 1 Only shielded Note 3 cables should be used for In Canada install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part Note 4 In the United States install in accar dance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the temi nals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 S cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Vec S Vma lsc lt Ima Ca Ccable La gt Li Leable Note 8 This module is certified as a compo nent for mounting in a suitable enclo sure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to accep tance by CSA or an inspection authority having the juridiction N C GIO NEM N C en 6 output 3 output 62 output 5 00 mock output 8 LS Module 140 DIO 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip output 7 output 8 connections Shields should be left open at the field and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Note 2 All
42. 140 DAM 590 00 510 35010516 05 2010 Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog Digital Modules VIII Introduction The following part provides information on the Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog Digital Modules What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 51 General Information 513 52 140 AII 330 00 Safe Analog IN Module 517 53 140 All 330 10 Safe Analog IN Module 539 54 140 AIO 330 00 Safe Analog OUT Module 551 55 140 DII 330 00 Safe Discrete IN Module 573 56 140 DIO 330 00 Safe Discrete OUT Module 563 35010516 05 2010 511 Intrinsically Safe Modules 512 35010516 05 2010 General Information 91 Purpose This chapter provides general information on Intrinsically Safe Modules What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Purpose and Considerations 514 Wiring Practices 515 35010516 05 2010 513 General Information Purpose and Considerations Purpose Module Location Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal means Intrinsically safe circuits use energy limiting devices known as intrinsically safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical equipment located in the
43. 20 mA 0 16000 Y CH3 RANGE 4 20 mA 0 16000 CH4 RANGE 4 20 mA 0 16000 Y CH5 RANGE 4 20 mA 0 16000 Y CH6 RANGE 4 20 mA 0 16000 Y CH7 RANGE 4 20 mA 0 16000 v CH8 RANGE 4 20 mA 0 16000 Jli LocalQj 2 140AII d Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 Address Inputs Ending 9 x Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module in AUXO module in other than other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUXS3 Channels CH1 Range 4 20 mA 0 16000 0 25 mA 0 25000 0 20 mA 0 20000 4 20 mA 0 4095 CH2 Range CH8 see CH1 Range Range 550 35010516 05 2010 140 AIO 330 00 Safe Analog OUT Module 54 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AIO 330 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 552 Indicators 553 Wiring Diagrams 554 Specifications 559 Addressing 560 Parameter Configuration 561 35010516 05 2010 551 140 AIO 330 00 Presentation Function The Quantum 140 AIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module controls and monitors current loops in intrinsically safe applications The module provides 8 dual ended output channels that are referenced over sense resistors to a single Common The output ranges 4 20 mA 0 20 mA and 25
44. CHANNELS CHANNEL 1 4 20 mA 0 16000 v CHANNEL2 4 20 mA 0 16000 v CHANNEL3 4 20 mA 0 16000 CHANNEL4 4 20 mA 0 16000 CHANNELS 4 20 mA 0 16000 v CHANNEL6 4 20 mA 0 16000 v CHANNEL 4 20 mA 0 16000 CHANNEL8 4 20 mA 0 16000 CHANNEL9 4 20 mA 0 16000 CHANNEL 10 4 20 mA 0 16000 w CHANNEL11 4 20 mA 0 16000 CHANNEL 12 4 20 mA 0 16000 v CHANNEL 13 4 20 mA 0 16000 CHANNEL 14 4 20 mA 0 16000 CHANNEL 15 20 mA 0 16000 v CHANNEL 16 4 20 mA 0 16000 1 Local 0 2 140 ACI Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 Address Inputs Ending 17 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module in AUXO module in other other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 Channels Channel1 Channel16 4 20 mA 0 16000 4 20 mA 0 4095 O 20 mA 0 20000 0 25 mA 0 25000 78 35010516 05 2010 140 ARI 030 10 Analog RTD IN Module About this Chapter The following chapter provides information of the Quantum 140 ARI 030 10 Module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 80 Indicators 81 Wiring Diagram 82 140 ARI 030 10 Specifications 84 Addressing 86 Parameter Configuration 89 35010516 05 2010 79 140 ARI 030 10
45. Internal Resistance 2 5 kohms Input Protection Resistor Limited 35010516 05 2010 185 140 DDI 353 00 Absolute Maximum Inputs Absolute Maximum Inputs Continuous 30 VDC 1 3 ms 56 VDC decaying pulse Response Response OFF ON 1ms max ON OFF 1ms max 186 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 353 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window DC IN 24V 4x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING l 1X INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 BINARY TASK MAST Y 1 Local Qj 2 140001 Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 32 2 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 187 140 DDI 353 00 188 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 353 10 24 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module 1 6 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 353 10 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 190 Indicators 191 Wiring Diagram 192 Specifications 193 Parameter Configuration 195 3501051
46. M Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD IW 3X v INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 64 MAST v T1 Local Qj 2 140 DSIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 64 4 Address Task Mast Fast fixed to Mast if Grayed if module in other than local module in other than local 35010516 05 2010 311 140 DSI 353 00 312 35010516 05 2010 Discrete OUT Modules VI Introduction What s in this Part The following part provides information on the Quantum Discrete OUT modules This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 31 General Information 315 32 140 DDO 153 10 5 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module 317 33 140 DDO 353 00 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module 327 34 140 DDO 353 01 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module 337 35 140 DDO 353 10 24 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module 347 36 140 DDO 364 00 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast OUT Module 357 37 140 DDO 843 00 10 60 VDC 2x8 Source OUT Module 367 38 140 DDO 885 00 24 125 VDC 2x6 Source OUT Module 377 39 140 DAO 840 00 24 230 VAC 16x1 OUT Module 389 40 140 DAO 840 10 24 115 VAC 16x1 OUT Module 399 41 140 DAO 842 10 100 230 VAC 4x4 OUT Module 409 42 140 DAO 842 20 24 48 VAC 4x4 OUT Module 421 43 140 DAO 853 00 230 VAC 4x8 So
47. SENSE2 N C INPUT 3 1 SENSE 3 INPUT 1 SENSE 4 NIC INPUT 5 4 SENSE 5 INPUT SENSE 6 N C INPUT 7 4 SENSE 7 INPUT 8 4 SENSE 8 N C Source A x Voltage Source 35010516 05 2010 61 140 ACI 030 00 External Wiring Recommendation 1 The user supplies the current and voltage sources installation and calibration of fuses are at the discretion of the user 2 Use shielded signal cable In noisy environnements twisted shielded cable is recommanded 3 Shielded cables should be connected to PLC s ground 4 A Shield Bar STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010 3020 should be used to connect the shielded cable to ground see Quantum with Unity Pro Hardware Reference Manual 5 The maximum channel to channel working voltage cannot exceed 30 Vdc 6 Not connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 62 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 030 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 8 Channel IN Differential External Power Not required Bus Current required Module 240 mA Power Dissipation 2W map 9 input words Error Detection Broken wire 4 20 mA mode or under voltage range 1 5 V Voltage Input Voltage Input Operating Voltage Chann
48. active device il passive device 594 35010516 05 2010 140 SAI 940 00S Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 8 Channel IN External Power Not required Bus Current required Module 400 mA Power Dissipation 3 5 W max map 13 input words Fault Detection out of 4 20 mA range e internal invalid channel system inoperative Isolation channel to Bus 1500 VAC eff for 1 minute Isolation channel to channel 500 VAC eff for 1 minute Current Input Current Input Absolute Current max 35 mA Linear Measuring Range 0 25 mA 0 64 800 counts Internal input impedance 287 ohms nominal Linear Measuring Ranges Table Linear measuring range Data Format Input Normal Warning 16 bit Format 0 25 mA 0 64 800 counts 9 720 3 75 mA 2 592 pt mA 52 488 20 25 mA 35010516 05 2010 595 140 SAI 940 00S Resolution Conversion Resolution Conversion Resolution 16 bits 0 65 536 counts Absolute Accuracy Error 0 3 25 degrees 77 F 0 35 Full Temperature Range Linearity 0 to 60 degrees C 2 Common Mode Rejection Input Filter Single pole low pass 3 dB cutoff 15 Hz Update Time 15 ms for all channels Fuses Fuses Internal None External User install
49. common note N C GROUP B HOT OUTPUT N C 9 OUTPUT 10 ya OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 N C GROUP C HOT GROUP C COMMON OUTPUT 13 N C ae OUTPUT 14 N C Hr 2 OUTPUT 15 N C mmm OUTPUT 16 N C GROUP D HOT GROUP D COMMON 1 Not Connected 2 This module is not polarity sensitive 3 When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 424 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 20 4 CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS e Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common single phase AC power source e Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output Use an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent in parallel with the switch Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE The output protection is composed of an RC filter snubber filter and a varistor e The snubber filter is optional The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the device used e Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage required by the device used 35010516 05 2010 425 140 DAO 842 20 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 OUT 4 groups x 4 points External Pow
50. where L Load Inductance Henry Load Current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance max 0 1 microF 150 VDC 0 6 microF 24 VDC 492 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 690 00 Isolation Isolation Input Group to Output 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output to Output 2500 VAC rms for 1 minute Module Protection Module Protection Input Protection Resistor limited Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppresion internal Fuses Fuses Input Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes Output Each output is protected by an electronic shutdown For current output surges between 4 A and 30 A the input point will shutdown after 0 5 s For current surges greater than 30 A the output will shutdown immediately 35010516 05 2010 493 140 DDM 690 00 140 DDM 690 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window 125VDC 4 40 HPO l Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT l 1x M 0X INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 8 OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 8 TASK MAST sd DUAL MODE DISABLE Y IL TER SELECTION M TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED M VALUE 0 1 Local Qj 2 140 DDM Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Descr
51. 29 42 V 93mA C 71nf L 2 0 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part for installation in Canada Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Vmax lsc lt C C Copie La z L Leable Note 8 This module is certified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUP A B C D See Sree SEE NOTE 1 I S Field Device R 500 OHMS Max SEENOTE2 NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION Monitor 1 Output 1 Monitor 2 N C Output 3 Monitor 3 should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end Ground Note 1 Only shielded cables N C Output 3
52. 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 353 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 353 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 329 140 DDO 353 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 00 wiring diagram OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 34A OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 3 na AN D OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 5 34A OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8 U Ny GROUP A SUPPLY GROUP A COMMON OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 16 OUTPUT 15 GROUP B SUPPLY GROUP B COMMON OUTPUT 18 OUTPUT 17 OUTPUT 20 OUTPUT 19 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 24 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C SUPPLY GROUP C COMMON You D OUTPUT 26 OUTPUT 25 AN gt OUTPUT 28 OUTPUT 27 Ls cay d FIELD OUTPUT 30 OUTPUT 29 DEVICE OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT 31 GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP D COMMON 68585 65885 85 85 amp 8 6 5 5 C9 C9 C9 amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp
53. 486 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 690 00 Indicators Version Levels Table The following table shows the version levels for the Module Types Products Minimum Version Level see User Action Required label illustration below CPUs and NOMs V02 20 Executive upgrade to 2 V02 10 2 V02 20 None RIOs V02 00 Module upgrade 2 V02 00 and V02 20 Executive upgrade to gt VO1 10 2 V02 20 None DIOs lt V02 10 Module upgrade 2 V02 10 None NOTE The version label see figure is found on the top front of the module Version Label Figure The following figure shows the version number location 125VDC 41 40 HPO SINK SOURCE PV 00 RL 77 SV 35010516 05 2010 487 140 DDM 690 00 Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDM 690 00 module Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDM 690 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red Over current condition on any point 1 4 left columns Green The indicated output point is turned ON 1 4 middle Red The indicated input point has an over current condition columns 1 and 4 right columns Green The indicated input point is turned ON 488 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 690 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDM 690 00 wiring diagr
54. 599 140 SAI 940 00S Parameter Configuration Modes of Operation The 140 SAI 940 00S module is configurable The configuration includes e Maximum consecutive CRC errors before declaring the module unhealthy Parameter and Default Values Parameter Configuration Window SAFETY AN IN 8CH CURR Overview Config yo Objects Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD IW 3X INPUT STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUT ENDING ADDRESS 13 TASK MAST MAX CONSECUTIVE CRC ERROR i Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3x Input Starting Address 1 Depends on the number of modules Input Ending Address 13 z Task MAST Max Consecutive CRC 1 Define the number of Error communication errors necessary to declare the module unhealthy 600 35010516 05 2010 140 SDI 953 00S Digital IN Module 59 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 SDI 953 00S module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 602 Indicators 603 Wiring Diagram 604 Specifications 607 Addressing 609 Parameter Configuration 612 35010516 05 2010 601 140 SDI 953 00S Presentation Function 140 SDI 953 008 is a 24VDC 16 channel digital input module NOTE If an error is detected during powe
55. 9 C C9 CAUTION OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 330 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 OUT 4 groups x 8 points Logic True High External Power 19 2 30 VDC Power Dissipation 1 75 W 0 4 V x Total module load Current Bus Current required Module 330 mA map 2 output word Fault Detection Output Blown fuse detect loss of field power Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 19 2 30 VDC Absolute Voltage max 56 VDC for 1 ms decaying pulse ON State Drop Point 0 4 VDC 0 5A Maximum Load Current Surge Current Maximum Load Current Surge Current Each Point Each Group 4A Per Module 16A Surge Current max Each Point 5 mA 500 ms duration no more than 6 per minute OFF State Leakage Point 0 4 mA 30 VDC Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppression internal
56. Action Call the Bus Editor Mark a free slot in the local station left mouse button Move the mouse pointer over the marked slot ny Click on the right mouse button Result A shortcut menu is opened Cut Copy m Insert New Device Select New Device Result A dialog window opens that displays available modules Select the desired module from the respective category in the Hardware catalog Result The new module is inserted in the empty slot on the local station 22 35010516 05 2010 Module Configuration Open the Parameter Configuration Overview The following dialog box enables you to call the parameter configuration for a module An explanation of the individual parameters can be found in the respective module chapters Open the Parameter Configuration This table shows the steps required to open the parameter configuration Step Action 1 Call the Bus Editor 2 Select the module 3 Click on the right mouse button Result A shortcut menu is opened Cut em Copy f Inser se Delete Module Open Module Move Module Power Supply and IO amp Budget 4 Select Open Module Result The module opens with the parameter configuration window
57. Monitor 7 Output 7 jJ Output 8 4 Monitor 8 LS Module AIO 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 31001364 Rev 00 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram Analog Output x n c SEE NOTE 1 HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUP A B C D Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end Note 2 More than one device can be connected as long as they have differential input and total input resistance is less than 500 ohms Note 3 The voltmeter is optional and reads voltage proportional to the current Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter Note 4 Unused channels will show open loop unless outputs are shorted as shown for channel8 Note 5 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module 35010516 05 2010 557 140 AIO 330 00 Field Wiring Field wiring to the module should consist of separate shielded twisted pair wires The acceptable field wire gauge should be AWG 30 to AWG 18 Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area Fixed Wiring System The Quantum140 AIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin
58. ON 0 5 of one line cycle max ON OFF 0 5 of one line cycle max 416 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 10 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal None External Protect each output point with an external fuse Schneider Electric recommends a 5 A fuse with an P T rating of less than 87 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A CAUTION OVER CURRENT TO OUPUTS Protect each point with a 5 A 250 V fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 35010516 05 2010 417 140 DAO 842 10 Illustration The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DAO 842 10 module PII Fuse Locations Ny ei 13 16 418 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 10 140 DAO 842 10 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window AC OUT 100 230V 4x4 m Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT 25M 0X v OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 TASK MAST M BINARY
59. Source 6 cables of one module must be routed separately from I S V Sense 6 cables of another module Chassis Source 7 Ground Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals mug satisfy the following conditions Ve Mu N C Note 3 Pins marked Not lsc lt max Source 8 Source 8 Ca C Cope Connected are not electronically La gt L Leable V Sense 8 V Sense 8 connected to the module Note 4 Only Quantum Note 8 This module is certified 1 5 Module All 330 00 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction as a component for mounting ii Blue Terminal Strip be used for mounting this module 35010516 05 2010 523 140 All 330 00 FM Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured as a RTD resistor connection Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with Entity Concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with RTD TC IN module with Concept Parameters listed below The entity parameters are per channel Voc 15 5 VDC Isc 276 mA Ch Ca 500 nf Ch La 0 3 mH Ch Po 1070 mW Ch HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION Class Div 2 Group A B C D Class Div Group A
60. 140 ACI 040 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 Channel IN Differential or externally tied single ended External Power Not required Operating Voltage Channel to 30 VDC max Channel Bus Current required Module 360 mA Power Dissipation 5W map 17 input words Error Detection Broken wire 4 20 mA mode Isolation Field to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute Current Input Current Input Absolute Current max 30 mA Linear Measuring Range 0 25 mA 25 000 counts 0 20 mA 20 000 counts 4 20 mA 0 16 000 counts 4 20 mA 0 4 095 counts Input Impedance 250 ohms nominal 74 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 040 00 Resolution Conversion Fuses Resolution Conversion Resolution 25 000 counts 20 000 counts 16 000 counts 0 0 0 0 4 095 counts Absolute Accuracy Error 25 degrees C 0 125 of full scale Linearity 0 to 60 degrees C 12 microA max 4 20 mA 6 microA max 0 25 mA 6 microA max O 20 mA 6 microA max 4 20 mA Accuracy drift with temperature Typical 0 0025 of full scale degrees C Maximum 0 005 of full scale degrees C Common Mode Rejection 90 dB 60 Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3 dB cutof
61. 140 All 330 00 UL Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD resistor connection Notes related to NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION UL certification Class 1 Division 1 for this module GROUP B C D Note 1 Entity parameters per ee Wee PNI stor channel V 15 5 V 21s mA Connection 047 uf La 466 uH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 l the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable Capacitance 60 Pf ft V Sense 3 4 Inductance 0 20 uH ft N C MESE RENE SEE NOTE 1 Source 4 f 2 Wire RID Resistor Connection Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United Stateg Note 5 To maintain intrinsic Source 5 safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible N C Source 6 4 Chassis Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair Ground cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the Note 6 Intrinsically Safe I S routed separately from I S cables of another module backplane Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to I S terminals mu satisfy the
62. 140 DAO 840 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 840 00 module Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 oak OWN 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fa 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 840 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 1 16 Red There is an error on the indicated point or channel 35010516 05 2010 391 140 DAO 840 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 00 wiring diagram L N 5 A fuse ae A OUTPUT 1 LINE A GO OUTPUT 2 LINE OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 LINE OUTPUT 3 INDUCTIVE OUTPUT 4 LINE OUTPUT4 LOAD G0 TRUE 40 Tus a OUTPUT 5 LINE OUTPUTS 21 00255 KC gos o OUTPUT 6 LINE OUTPUT 6 R c pelo OUTPUT 7 LINE OUTPUT 7 5 24 240 Vac OUTPUT 8 LINE OUTPUT 8 Output protection example see note N C Qo NIC OUTPUT 9 LINE OUTPUT 9 62 9 OUTPUT 10 LINE OUTPUT 10 64 63 OUTPUT 11 LINE OUTPUT 11 169 s OUTPUT 12 LINE OUTPUT 12 2e lolo OUTPUT 13 LINE OUTPUT 13 H OUTPUT 14 LINE OUTPUT 14 63 OUTPUT 15 LINE OUTPUT 15
63. 15 14 13 12 111 109 8 7 6 5 413 21110 1 Output value on channel 9 1 Output value on channel 10 1 Output value on channel 11 1 Output value on channel 12 1 Output value on channel 13 1 Output value on channel 14 1 Output value on channel 15 1 Output value on channel 16 Words 2 3 and 4 are used by the module for internal checking e Exchange number serial number of the set of data e Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC function used to detect errors after transmission 35010516 05 2010 621 140 SDO 953 00S Flat Addressing Input words The following diagram shows the register of the first input word If bit 15 is set to 1 it means that the output is energized on channel 1 If bit 14 is set to 1 it means that the output is energized on channel 2 and so on Word 1 __ 1 output energized on channel 1 __ 1 output energized on channel 2 __ 1 output energized on channel 3 __ 1 output energized on channel 4 1 output energized on channel 5 __ 1 output energized on channel 6 __ 1 output energized on channel 7 1 output energized on channel 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 output energized on channel 9 1 output energized on channel 10 1 output energized on channel
64. 29 30 31 32 Point 17 MSB Second Word Input Words Sense Word 3 Input Sense 2 5 6 t 12 13 14 15 16 Point 1 MSB First Word Word 4 Input Sense Point 17 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 MSB Second Word Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point Object Comment Input 1 l b e r m 1 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 1 Value Input 31 l b e r m 31 1 Value Input 32 l b e r m 32 1 Value Broken Wire 1 l b e r m 1 2 Value Broken Wire 2 l b e r m 2 2 Value Broken Wire 31 9el Vo eVr m 31 2 Value Broken Wire 32 l b e r m 32 2 Value 35010516 05 2010 309 140 DSI 353 00 Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point V O Object Comment Inputword 1 IW b e r m 1 1 Value Inputword 2 9elW Wb eVr m 1 2 Value Inputword 3 9e6IW W eVr m 1 3 Broken Wire Flag Inputword 4 9e6IW Wb eVr m 1 4 Broken Wire Flag Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot I O Map Status Byte The eight bits in the I O map status byte are used as follows 8 7 16 5 4 131211 L Group A Broken Wire Group B Broken Wire Group C Broken Wire Group D Broken Wire 310 35010516 05 2010 140 DSI 353 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window Supervised 24V DC Input
65. 4 a 140 XTS 002 00 wiring terminal block 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Field Wiring Terminal Block not provided with the module 4 Removable Door not provided with the module 5 Red Customer Identification Label Fold label provided with the module and place it inside the door NOTE The housing of safety modules is red and a red customer identification label is provided with Quantum Safety I O modules It shall be placed on the terminal block 590 35010516 05 2010 140 SAI 940 00S Grounding Kit It is recommanded to use the STB XSP 3000 earthing kit and the STB XSP 3010 or STB XSP 3020 grounding clips The following figure shows those elements Kit Comes with STB XSP 3000 two side brackets one 1 m grounding bar and one FE grounding clamp Side brackets ge FE grounding clamp Grounding bar STB XSP 3010 10 small cable clamps for 1 5mm to 6 5mm cable WL STB XSP 3020 10 medium cable clamps for 5mm to 11mm cable WL 35010516 05 2010 591 140 SAI 940 00S Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 SAI 940 00S module R Active 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 8 8 NOTE The 140 SAI 940 005 module does not use the 9 16 red and green channel LEDs Description The following table shows the LED description
66. 5 30 VDC 30 150 VDC reduced load Current Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point 2 A max 250 VAC 60 degrees C ambient resistive load 5A 40 C see the derating curve below 2 A Tungsten lamp load 3 A a power factor of 0 4 1 4 hp 125 250 VAC Each Point 30 150 VDC 300 mA restive load 100 mA L R 10 msec Maximum module Current 40 A see the derating curve below Surge Current max 20 A capacitive load t 10 ms 35010516 05 2010 453 140 DRC 830 00 The following figure shows the relay derating curve TOTAL MODULE CURRENT A Minimum Load Current Isolation Response Minimum Load Curre 40 30 20 10 nt Relay Derating Curve 40 50 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Degrees C Minimum Load Current 50 mA Note Minimum load Current if the contact is used at rated loads of 5 150 VDC or 20 250 VAC OFF State Leakage lt 100 uA Isolation Output to Output 1780 VAC rms for one minute Field to Bus 1780 VAC rms for one minute 2500 for one minute Response OFF ON 10 ms max ON OFF 20 ms max 454 35010516 05 2010 140 DRC 830 00 Relay Relay Relay type Form C NO NC contacts Contact Protection Varistor 275 V internal Mechanical Operations 10 000 000 E
67. CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUP A B C D m J SEENOTE 1 Field Device 500 OHMS Ma SEE NOTE 2 Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end Note 2 More than one device can be connected as long as they have differential input and total input resistance is less than 500 ohms Note 3 The voltmeter is optional and reads voltage proportional to the current Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter Note 4 Unused channels will show open loop unless outputs are shorted as shown for channel 8 Note 5 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 6 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules 140 CPU xxx xx 140 CPS xxx xx 556 35010516 05 2010 140 AIO 330 00 Cenelec Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Parameters per channel Vo 29 5 Vde lo 94 mA Ch Po 2 520 mW ch Co 68 nf ch Lo 2 42 mH ch NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION Monitor 1 Output 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 jJ Ground Output 3 Output 4 N C N C N C Monitor 5 See Note 3 Monitor 6 Output 6 4
68. Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT I 1X M INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 BINARY i TASK MAST v T1 1 2 140 DAIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 16 1 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 237 140 DAI 340 00 238 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 353 00 24 VAC 4x8 IN Module 22 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 353 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 240 Indicators 241 Wiring Diagram 242 Specifications 243 Parameter Configuration 245 35010516 05 2010 239 140 DAI 353 00 Presentation Function The AC Input 24 VAC 4x8 module accepts 24 VAC inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 353 00 module and its components 6 2 7 o _ er 5 NEU Y Bo 1 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code
69. Error Detection None Wiring length 400 m max Output Ranges Output Ranges Voltages Bipolar 10 VDC Min load resistance 1 kohms 5 VDC Min load resistance 500 ohms Voltages Unipolar 0 10 VDC Min load resistance 1 kohms 0 5 VDC Min load resistance 500 ohms Output Current 10 mA max any range Outputs are shortcut proof Source Resistance 0 1 ohms NOTE The range is determined by Jumpers see wiring diagram Resolution Accuracy Resolution Accuracy Resolution 12 bit Accuracy Error 25 degrees C 0 15 of full scale Linearity 1 LSB Accuracy Drift with Temperature Accuracy Drift with Temperature Unipolar Ranges Typical 0 003 of full scale degrees C Maximum 0 005 of full scale degrees C Bipolar Ranges Typical 0 004 of full scale degrees C Maximum 0 007 of full scale degrees C 35010516 05 2010 145 140 AVO 020 00 Times Isolation Fuses Times Max Settling Time 700 us to 0 1 of the final value Update Time 3 ms for all channels Isolation Channel to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Channel to Channel 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Fuses Internal Not required External An external fuse is required on the master override signal when it is connected to an external source The required fuse
70. Hz Load Capacitance max 50 uF 35010516 05 2010 343 140 DDO 353 01 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal 5 A fuse for each group Part 043502405 or equivalent For the location of the fuses see figure below External User installed per local and national electrical codes 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Illustration The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DDO 353 00 module 149 DDO 353 10 Fuse Locations Points 1 8 Points 9 16 Points 17 24 N Points My Gu 25 32 344 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 01 140 DDO 353 01 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window DC OUT 24V 4x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING M OX i OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 TASK MAST i BINARY TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED v VALUE 1 0 VALUE 2 0 2 140 DDG Parameter Default Values Name
71. INPUT 1 P d TT GROUP A COMMON INPUT 3 GROUP B COMMON N C INPUT 5 GROUP C COMMON INPUT 7 GROUP D COMMON N C INPUT 9 GROUP E COMMON INPUT 11 GROUP F COMMON N C INPUT 13 GROUP G COMMON INPUT 15 GROUP H COMMON N C FIELD DEVICE 218 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 841 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 IN 8 groups x 2 points Logic True High External Power 10 60 VDC group supply Power Dissipation 1 0 W 0 25 W x the number of points ON Bus Current required 200 mA map 1 input word Group Supply Tolerance Group Supply Tolerance Group supply Tolerance ON State OFF State 12 VDC 5 9 12 VDC 0 1 8 VDC IEC 57 Class2 24 VDC 15 20 11 24 VDC 0 5 VDC IEC 65A Type 2 48 VDC 15 20 34 48 VDC 0 10 VDC IEC 65A Type 1 60 VDC 15 20 45 60 VDC 0 9 VDC IEC 57 Class1 ON OFF state ranges are specified at nominal reference voltages Isolation Isolation Group to Group 700 VDC for 1 minute Group to Bus 2500 VDC for 1 minute Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes 35010516 05 2010 219 140 DDI 841 00 Input Rating Input Rating Absolute Maximum Input 75 VDC Input Protection Resi
72. Input 8 9e6IW W eVr m 8 Value 9el Vo eV r m 8 1 Broken wire or Out of range Status Word 96IW No eVr m 9 Status of input channels Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot 548 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 10 IODDT The 140 All 030 10 Input Module uses the T ANA IN VE IODDT IODDT Name Object Data Type Name T ANA IN VE ANA IN VWE userdefined 9elWr m c 0 Int VALUE 9elr m c 1 Bool ERROR Used abbreviations r rack m module slot c channel b bus e equipment drop Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off NOTE In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for 1 Q I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 All 030 10 Input Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 6 5 4 13 2 1 L 1 Broken wire on one or more input channels 35010516 05 2010 549 140 All 330 10 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window IS AN IN 8CH CURR Config Parameter Name MAPPING Value WORD IW 3x INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 9 TASK MAST F CHANNELS RANGE 4 20 mA 0 16000 v CH2 RANGE 4
73. MONITOR 2 4 DEVICE SOURCE 20 iG ue M O DEVICE I SINK 2 12 MONITOR 3 4 SOURCE 4 n LOOP SUPPLY 122 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 020 00 External Wiring Recommendation 1 6 7 The user supplies the current and voltage sources installation and calibration of fuses are at the discretion of the user Use shielded signal cable In noisy environnements twisted shielded cable is recommended Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC s ground A Shield Bar STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010 3020 should be used to connect the shielded cable to ground see Quantum with Unity Pro Hardware Reference Manual Unused channels indicate broken wire status unless wired to the loop supply as shown on Channel 4 In this example loop supply must be 30 V or less The wiring example shows Channel 1 acting as a current sink and Channel 2 acting as a current source for their respective field devices Not Connected NOTE VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the current Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 123 140 ACO 020 00 Specifications General Specifications Voltage General Specifications Modu
74. N C N C N C CURRENT SINK 2 Field Device 4 20 mA Current ING SENSE 1 IN SENSE 2 N C IN SENSE 3 ING SENSE 4 Sensor 0 10V N C Output 35010516 05 2010 157 140 AMM 090 00 External Wiring Recommendation The following information pertains to the wiring diagram above Output Section 2 Channels Typical Wiring Outputs Channel 1 The output shows a connection to an external field device and optional monitor Channel 2 The output shows a connection to an external field device and the input of channel 1 Input Section 4 Channels Typical Wiring Inputs Channel 1 Channel 1 shows 4 20 mA current input controlled by output section Channel 2 Channel 4 The input shows a connection to a voltage output sensor 1 Jumpers are required between IN and SENSE terminals for all current input ranges 2 Pins 1 20 are outputs Pins 21 40 are inputs 3 Use shielded signal cable In noisy environnements twisted shielded cable is recommended Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC s ground 5 A Shield Bar STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010 3020 should be used to connect the shielded cable to ground see Quantum with Unity Pro Hardware Reference Manual 6 For Inputs the maximum channel to channel working voltage cannot exceed 30 Vdc 7 Not Connected
75. Output 1 9eQ Wo eVr m 1 Value Output 2 9eQ WVo eVr m 2 Value Output 11 9eQ Wo eV r m 11 Value Output 12 9eQ WVo eVr m 12 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Outputword 1 9eQW eVr m 1 1 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot I O Map Status Byte Outputs The least significant bit in the output I O map status byte is used as follows For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Module Error any channel error turns on this bit 16 Point Output Modules The 16 point output modules are as follows 140DAO84000 AC Output 24 230 Vac 16x1 140DAO84010 AC Output 24 115 Vac 16x1 140DAO84210 AC Output 100 230 Vac 4x4 140DAO84220 AC Output 48 Vac 4x4 140DDO84300 DC Output 10 60 VDC 2x8 Source 140DRA84000 Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open 44 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Flat Addressing The output modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous discrete M output references or as one MW output word in the following formats For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 To
76. Output Protection internal RC snubber suppression Response Response OFF ON 0 5 of one line cycle max ON OFF 0 5 of one line cycle max Fuses Fuses Internal None External Protect each output with an external 5 A fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87 A CAUTION 87 OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS Protect each point with an external 5 A 250 V fuse with an I2T rating of less than Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 406 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 840 10 140 DAO 840 10 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window AC OUT 24 115V 16x1 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING M 0X M OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 TASK MAST M P P BINARY Y TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED M VALUE 0 Tut Local 2 140 DAG Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping M Ox WORD MW 4X Output Starting 1 1 Address Output Ending 16 1 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Output Type BINARY BCD Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State USER DEFINED 35010516 05 2010 407 140 DAO 840 10 4
77. S E 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 348 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 10 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 353 10 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 353 10 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 349 140 DDO 353 10 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 10 wiring diagram OUTPUT 2 2 D OUTPUT 1 24 Vdc OUTPUT 4 4 9 OUTPUT 3 vu AN p GROUP A SUPPLY 9 OUTPUT 10 42 11 OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 12 13 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 14 15 OUTPUT 1 QUTPUT 16 gureuris GROUP B SUPPLY GROUP B COMMON OUTPUT 18 22 9 OUTPUT 17 OUTPUT 20 G3 OUTPUT 19 OUTPUT 22 Q5 OUTPUT 21 QUTPUT 24 G7 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C SUPPLY GROUP C COM
78. of a tool and provision for Division 2 wiring methods 35010516 05 2010 555 140 AIO 330 00 UL Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to UL certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel 29 5 V Isc 93 MA C 68 nf L 2 0 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 If the electrical parameter of the cable are unknown the following values must be used for Ccable and Leable Capacitance 60 Inductance 0 20 uH ft Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 S cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Voc lt Vmax lse lt Imax Ca gt Coable La gt Li Leable 31001364 Rev 00 NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION Qo Output 1 J go Monitor 1 Output A ie 5 6 N C Output 6 N C Output 7 15 Module AIO 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip Chassis Ground See Note 3 140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram HAZARDOUS LOCATION
79. or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction Sassi 522 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection Notes related to NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION CSA certification Class 1 Division 1 for this module Group A B C D LE eel SEE NOTE 1 Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Voe 15 5 V Iso 123 C 0 47 uf ms 10 mH Thermocouple Type J K E T R SB SEE NOTE 2 Note 2 Maximum non N C hazardous area voltage must Source 2 4 not exceed 250 V Chassis V Sense 2 Ground Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair Note 3 Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part for installation in Canada cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Source V Sense 3 Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 N C N C and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for T Is Note 2 Thermocouple tip may installation in the United States ource 4 ource 4 be grounded if required V Sense 4 Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable Source 5 must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals V Sense 5 w SEE NOTE 1 as possible NIC e Note 6 Intrinsically Safe LS
80. 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window IS AN OUT Config Parameter Name MAPPING WORD MW 4x 1 OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 8 TASK MAST CHANNELS zi CHANNEL1 RANGE SELECTION 0 20 mA 0 4095 TIMEOUT STATE LAST VALUE TIMEOUT VALUE 0 CHANNEL2 CHANNEL3 CHANNEL4 CHANNELS CHANNEL6 AHHAA EE CHANNEL alalalalalalalaialata CHANNEL8 Local QJ 7 2 140 AIO 35010516 05 2010 561 140 AIO 330 00 Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD MW 4X Outputs Starting 1 Address Outputs Ending 8 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module in AUXO module in other other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 Channels Channel1 Range Selection 4 20 mA 0 16000 4 20 mA 0 4095 0 20 mA 0 20000 0 25 mA 0 25000 Timeout State DISABLED LAST VALUE USER DEFINED Timeout Value 0 0 65535 only enabled Timeout State USER DEFINED Channel2 Channel8 see Channel1 562 35010516 05 2010 140 DIO 330 00 Safe Discrete OUT Module 56 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 module What s in
81. 140 DDO 153 10 5 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module 32 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 153 10 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 318 Indicators 319 Wiring Diagram 320 Specifications 321 Maintenance 323 140 DDO 153 10 Parameter Configuration 325 35010516 05 2010 317 140 DDO 153 10 Presentation Function The DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink module switches 5 VDC loads It is for use with shared output common wired to positive potential and is compatible with TTL LS S and CMOS logic Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 153 10 module and its components e 6 27 1 IR l Omna Stu Y o 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 318 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 153 10 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators
82. 140 DDO 885 00 module and its components 2 Tem 6 2 o l 1 Omn NEU Bo N 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 378 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 885 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 885 00 module with status indication Active 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 885 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An over current condition on any point has been detected 1 12 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON T 212 Red The indicated output point has an over current condition NOTE To clear an error indication the point must be commanded OFF in user logic 35010516 05 2010 379 140 DDO 885 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 885 00 wiring diagram N C N C N C N C amp 9 5 9 COT BROUP A SUPPLY i OUTPUT 1 Ny N C OUTPUT2 OUTPUT 3 GR
83. 2 A Q 10 ms once internal current limitation OFF State Leakage Point 0 5 mA 30 VDC 618 35010516 05 2010 140 SDO 953 00S Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group N A Group to Bus 1500 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection e transient voltage suppression internal overload e disjunction 0 7 A 10 ms current limitation 2 A Response Resistive Loads Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 20 ms max ON OFF 20 ms max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance max 0 5 Henry 11 Hz switch frequency or where L 7 Load inductance henry Luc PF Load current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance max 50 uF Fuses Fuses Internal None External Mandatory fast blow max 10 A determined by the module load current A CAUTION OVERCURRENT TO THE OUPUTS Use fast acting fuses to protect the electronic components of the module from overcurrent Improper fuse selection could result to damage to the module Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 35010516 05 2010 619 140 SDO 953 00S Addressing Overview The following information describes how the data exchanged between the 140 SDO 953 00S module and the proce
84. 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 240 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 353 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 353 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 353 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 241 140 DAI 353 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 353 00 wiring diagram INPUT 2 NPUT 1 INPUT 4 NPUT 3 INPUT 6 NPUT 5 INPUT 8 NPUT 7 NIC GROUP A COMMON INPUT 10 rO NPUT 9 INPUT 12 NPUT 11 INPUT 14 NPUT 13 INPUT 16 NPUT 15 E N C GROUP B COMMON INPUT 18 D NPUT 17 INPUT 20 NPUT 19 INPUT 22 NPUT 21 INPUT 24 NPUT 23 px GROUP C COMMON N C INPUT 26 O NPUT 25 INPUT 28 NPUT 27 INPUT 30 NPUT 29 INPUT 32 NPUT 31 ON GROUP D COMMON N C NOTE This module is not polarity sensitive Not Connec
85. 32 Green Points 33 to 64 displayed on LED matrix 64 Green Points 65 to 96 displayed on LED matrix Pushbutton Use the pushbutton to select input points to be displayed as per the following table LED 32 64 Out 1 to 32 Off Off Out 33 to 64 On Off Out 65 to 96 Off On 35010516 05 2010 201 140 DDI 364 00 Color Codes Color Codes for Input groups Table indicating cable color coding for all input groups 1 white 2 brown 3 green 4 yellow 5 gray 6 pink 7 blue 8 red 9 black 10 purple 11 gray pink 12 red blue 13 white green 14 brown green 15 white yellow 16 yellow brown 17 white gray 18 gray brown 19 white pink 20 pink brown 202 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 364 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 96 IN 6 groups x 16 points Power Dissipation 1 35 W 0 13 W x the number of points ON Bus Current required 270 mA max map 6 input words Isolation Isolation Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus Input Rating Input Rating ON Level voltage 15 VDC OFF Level voltage 5 VDC ON Level current 2 5 mA min OFF Level current 0 7mA Internal Resistance 6 7 kohm Input Protection Resistor Limited Absolute Maximum Inputs Absolute Maximum Inputs Continuo
86. 35010516 05 2010 331 140 DDO 353 00 Response Resistive Loads Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1 ms max ON OFF 1 ms max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance max 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or L 0 5 where L Load inductance henry 2 Load current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance max 50 uF 332 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 00 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal 5 A fuse for each group Part 043502405 or equivalent For the location of the fuses see figure below External The internal fuse protects a group but not each output switch for all possible overload conditions The user must protect each point with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse A CAUTION OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 35010516 05 2010 333 140 DDO 353 00
87. 4X INPUT STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUT ENDING ADDRESS 7 OUTPUT STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUT ENDING ADDRESS 4 TASK MAST OUTPUT TYPE BINARY Y MAX CONSECUTIVE CRC ERROR 1 MODULE TIME OUT 200 amp TIMEOUT STATE amp CHANNEL 1 USER DEFINED bd VALUE 1 amp CHANNEL 2 HOLD LAST VALUE Y i VALUE 0 amp CHANNEL HOLD LAST VALUE Y amp CHANNEL 4 HOLD LAST VALUE amp CHANNEL 5 HOLD LAST VALUE v 5 CHANNEL 6 HOLD LAST VALUE Y amp CHANNEL 7 HOLD LAST VALUE CHANNEL 8 HOLD LAST VALUE Y t CHANNEL 9 HOLD LAST VALUE Y amp CHANNEL 10 HOLD LAST VALUE 5 CHANNEL 11 HOLD LAST VALUE Y CHANNEL 12 HOLD LAST VALUE Y t CHANNEL 13 HOLD LAST VALUE Y amp CHANNEL 14 HOLD LAST VALUE 5 CHANNEL 15 HOLD LAST VALUE Y CHANNEL 16 HOLD LAST VALUE 35010516 05 2010 627 140 SDO 953 00S Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3x MW 4x Input Starting Address 1 Depends on the number of modules Input Ending Address 7 Output Starting Address 1 Depends on the number of modules Output Ending Address 4 Task MAST Output Type BINARY Max Consecutive CRC 1 Define the number of communication Error errors necessary to declare the module unhealthy Module TimeOut 200 ms Define how long the outputs last before going to their fallback position in case no communication from the proce
88. 590 00 module is used in a RIO drop the 140 CRA 93X 00 RIO Drop must be Version 1 04 at a minimum Check the version label see below on the top front of the 140 CRA 93X 00 module and ensure that it is at the proper revision level 500 35010516 05 2010 140 DAM 590 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAM 590 00 wiring diagram OUTPUT 1 NIC ourPUT2 Fuse OY eles OUTPUT 3 6 INDUCTIVE N C OUTPUT 4 LOAD OUTPUT GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT GROUP A COMMON Y D OUTPUT 5 RS R M OUTPUT 6 NV N C 24 240 Vac OUTPUT 8 Output protection example N C see last note OUTPUT GROUP B SUPPLY G9 OUTPUT GROUP B COMMON IET INPUT 1 INPUT 4 D INPUT 3 INPUT 6 INPUT 5 INPUT 8 amp INPUT 7 N C INPUT GROUP A COMMON input 10 INPUT 9 5 NPUT 12 INPUT 11 __ INPUT 14 ia INPUT 13 L oe G6 5 1 16 INPUTS N C INPUTGROUP B COMMON A 35010516 05 2010 501 140 DAM 590 00 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e cut off the power to the module sensors and pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructi
89. 6 2 7 o _ er 5 NEU Y Bo 1 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 296 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 753 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 753 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 753 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 297 140 DAI 753 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 753 00 wiring diagram N C GROUP D COMMON INPUT 2 INPUT 1 N INPUT 4 INPUT 3 INPUT 6 INPUT 5 2 INPUT8 INPUT 7 D N GROUP A COMMON INPUT 10 D INPUT 9 INPUT 12 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 INPUT 13 INPUT 16 G INPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON INPUT 18 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 INPUT 19 23 INPUT 22 INPUT 21 5 INPUT 24 INPUT 23 D GROUP C COMMON INPUT 26 INPUT 25 63 65 INPUT 28 INPUT
90. 76 Parameter Configuration 78 140 ARI 030 10 Analog RTD IN Module 79 Presentation 3e eae dnt nd Iu esr pure d que Tu Era E 80 laneci Rete 81 Wiring Diagram RERUMS ee I Rp 82 140 ARI 030 10 84 Addressing vous tk cr pm Ge ed a RA HU eq ge 86 Parameter 89 140 ATI 030 00 Analog TC IN Module 91 Presentation me uh Ry eo Repo Ro ERE RE Rc 92 Indicators T 93 Wiring Diagram herbe p EIE EE DE E 94 Specifications chino xen be aod PARLE benz ba equa 97 Addressing Siriese tee ve beak POI ET EY Eee 101 Parameter Configuration 103 140 AVI 030 00 Analog Mixed Current Voltage IN MOGUIG RR RC S a Rx Re eR ARS LS 105 Presentation IHRER a a dpt rd 106 IridiCatOrS s ME er pore up acest E eo oe 107 Wiring Diagram ore ue o IN ERR ed ngu Ee RR VER EE 108 Specifications E ED EAE EU dba edd 110 Addressing 42 no IE RED ee heme sr 113 Parameter 115 Analog OUT Modules 117 140 ACO 020 00 Analog Current OUT Module 119 Presentation eee LO wich ea ELO iue RW 120 Indicators near ee Gere E ares 121 Wiring Diag
91. Bo 1 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 272 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 543 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 543 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fa 8 Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 543 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 273 140 DAI 543 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 543 00 wiring diagram eo erp NIC oe INPUT 3 SS 6 5 ee Nie G INPUT 4 m NIC N C 3 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 MER IA c INPUT 7 NIG 5 o a ere e Ly hie INPUT 9 INPUT 10 NIC G3 INPUT 11 N C NIC 23 INPUT 12 NIC INPUT 13 AG INPUT 14 Nic INPUT 15 ie INPUT 16 NI GROUP B COMMON NOTE All inputs in a gro
92. C D Class Il Div Group E F G Class Ill Div I Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end Source 1 MQ Qu Source 1 N C I Source 2 Source 2 Nete 2 Pins marked N C are not electronically connected to Module RTD Resistor Note 3 Only 140XBP0xx00 backplanes should be used for Connection mounting this module Chassis Note 4 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically Ground safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination a system when the approved values V Sense 2 Source 3 V Sense 3 of Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically safe apparatus plus all cable parameters ISource 4 WIAA e Source 4 Oe cz Ca Ci Ccable La Li Leable Voc Vmax Isc Imax Sense cole Source 5 N C 2 Wire Note 5 Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will RTD Resistor neither generate nor store more than 1 2V 0 1A 20uJ or 25 mW Conrfeotion For examples switches Thermocouples LEDs and RTDs etc B NC Note 6 Wiring methods must
93. Default Value Options Description Mapping 96M 0x WORD MW 4X Output Starting 1 1 Address Output Ending 32 2 Address Output Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 1 Value 2 0 0 65535 only if Timeout State USERDEFINED 35010516 05 2010 345 140 DDO 353 01 346 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 10 24 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module 3 5 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 353 10 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 348 Indicators 349 Wiring Diagram 350 Specifications 351 Maintenance 353 140 DDO 353 10 Parameter Configuration 355 35010516 05 2010 347 140 DDO 353 10 Presentation Function The 24 VDC Sink 4x8 Output module switches 24 VDC loads capable of driving displays logic and other loads up to 500 mA with shared output common wired to positive potential in the ON state Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 10 module and its components O 6 2 IR Omna NEU
94. External Power Not required Bus Current required Module 200 mA Power Dissipation 1W map 9 input words Input Impedance gt 10 MQ Error Detection Out of range or 8 red LEDs to indicate broken wire conditions IEC Platinum PT 100 PT 200 PT 500 PT 1000 200 850 degrees C American Platinum PT 100 PT 200 PT 500 PT 1000 100 450 degrees C Nickel N 100 N 200 N 500 N 1000 60 180 degrees C Measurement Current Resolution Conversion PT 100 PT 200 N100 N200 2 5 mA PT 500 PT 1000 N 500 N 1000 0 5 mA Resolution 0 1 degree C Absolute Accuracy Error 0 5 degrees C 25 degrees C 0 9 degrees C 0 60 degrees C Linearity 0 to 60 degrees C 0 01 of full scale 0 60 degrees C 84 35010516 05 2010 140 ARI 030 10 Isolation Update Time all channels Channel to Channel 300 Vpp Channel to Bus 1780 VAC Q 47 63 Hz for 1 minute 2500 VDC 2 wire 640 ms 4 wire 3 wire 1 2s 35010516 05 2010 85 140 ARI 030 10 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires nine contiguous 16 bit words eight fo
95. Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red No power applied to the output group s or input out of range 1 2 Green Module outputs switched ON left column 1 2 Red Broken wire on indicated output channels middle column 1 4 Red Indicates input status under over range right column To prevent improper fault indications unused inputs should have the plus and minus inputs tied together and be configured for a bipolar input range 35010516 05 2010 155 140 AMM 090 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration 4 CAUTION UNWIRED INPUTS CAUSE INVALID READINGS When configured for voltage inputs no jumper installed between In and sense terminals if a broken field wire occurs readings will be non zero and not predictable Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 156 35010516 05 2010 140 AMM 090 00 The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 AMM 090 00 analog input output module CURRENT SOURCE 1 N C N C CURRENT SOURCE 1 CURRENT SOURCE 1 N C N C CURRENT SOURCE 2 CURRENT SOURCE 2 CURRENT SOURCE 2 MONITOR 1 Ey 5 VN Optional Monitor N C Voltmeter 1V24mA N C 24Vdc _ N C Supply CURRENT SINK 1 Field Device MONITOR 2 4 20 Current
96. Input Points 8 IN Operating Voltages and Currents No load voltage between 8 VDC input and input Short circuit current 8 mA Switching point 1 2 mA 2 1 mA Switching hysteresis 0 2 mA Switching Frequency 100 Hz maximum Response OFF ON 1ms ON OFF 1 ms Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 VAC 47 63 Hz or 2500 VDC for 1 min Internal Resistance 2 5 K ohms Input Protection Resistor limited Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 400 mA Power Dissipation 2W External Power Not required Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible 35010516 05 2010 581 140 DII 330 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window 1 5 digital input Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING I 1X Ir INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 8 BINARY Y TASK MAST v JI 1 Local Qd 2 140 DDIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 8 1 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 582 35010516 05 2010 Quantum S
97. None 212 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 673 00 A CAUTION SOFTWARE INCOMPATIBILITY CAUSES INVALID INPUT READINGS Ensure that the minimum version levels are met as identified in the table above When using a DIO drop and the CPU and NOM executive software is not per the compatibility chart channels 17 24 of this module will be seen as zeroes in the controller when configured as discretes Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage The procedure to update the version level on your module product is decribed in the OS Loader user manual Version Label Figure The following figure shows the version label CPU 2M 2XMB 02 20 Controller NOTE The version label is found on the top front of the module 35010516 05 2010 213 140 DDI 673 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window 125VDC IN 24PT 3x8 M Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT l 1X m INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 24 TASK MAST vi BINARY M FILTER SELECTIONS GROUPA 0 7 ms vi GROUPB 0 7 ms M GROUP C 0 7 ms v 11 Local Qu 2 140 DDI Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT l 1x WORD IW 3X Intputs Starting 1 1 Address Intputs Ending 24 2 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if modul
98. ON 35010516 05 2010 225 140 DDI 853 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 853 00 wiring diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 4 e e PUT 6 INPUT 8 GROUP A SUPPLY INPUT 10 INPUT 12 INPUT 14 INPUT 16 GROUP B SUPPLY INPUT 18 INPUT 20 INPUT 22 INPUT 24 GROUP C SUPPLY INPUT 26 INPUT 28 INPUT 30 INPUT 32 GROUP D SUPPLY amp amp amp amp 8585 8 G 9 6 D 9 C2 9 O INPUT1 y o 7 T y o e INPUTS oo INPUT y o e GROUP A COMMON INPUTS INPUT 13 yaa FIELD DEVICE INPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON INPUT 17 INPUT 19 INPUT 21 INPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON INPUT 25 INPUT 27 INPUT 29 INPUT 31 GROUP D COMMON NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 226 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 853 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 IN 4 groups x 8 points Logic True High External Power 10 60 VDC group supply Power Dissipation 1 0 W 0 25 W x the number of points ON Bus Current required 300 mA map 2 input words Fault Dete
99. Presentation Function The DC Input 24 VDC 4x8 Sink module accepts 24 VDC inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 353 00 module and its components 2 sem 6 2 IR Omn p NEU Bo N 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 182 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 353 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 353 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 353 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 183 140 DDI 353 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 353 00 wiring diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 4 INPUT 6 INPUT 8 N C INPUT 10 INPUT 12 INPUT 14 INPUT 16 N C INPUT 18 INPUT 20 INPUT 22 INPUT 24 N C INPUT 26 INPUT 28 INPUT 30 INPUT 32 N C
100. RE Rer e ea ee pe E t Ea 351 Maintenance 353 140 DDO 353 10 Parameter 355 Chapter 36 140 DDO 364 00 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast OUT Module 357 Presentation ueber eas Seine Bee FR Meu De ey 358 IndicatorS 2 GI cd RR Pte PIRE REDE 361 140 DDO 364 00 Cable Color 362 Specifications s cxx E RUE REEL AS 363 140 DDO 364 00 Parameter 365 Chapter 37 140 DDO 843 00 10 60 VDC 2x8 Source OUT Module 367 Presentations oe oer ae E Re ere dk Sate ce RE e Ss 368 Indicators ae oU eU ED eed aie E veste E IE 369 Wiring Diagram 2e snp eti eed nhi hed ee DE RU rs 370 Specifications secet Re eC IRR ET eee 371 Maintenance Jesi me cr eu Dare nx Gee aoe a e es 373 140 DDO 843 00 Parameter 375 10 35010516 05 2010 Chapter 38 140 DDO 885 00 24 125 VDC 2x6 Source OUT Module 377 Presentation rodne esee eer e eee Teas dep den ya 378 Indicators cz ect SED cec puo Im wee deme a eR na 379 Wiring Diagram 1 RII IIR 380 Specifications ucro Ree cR RE Re ARCET ee ee 382 Maintenance pois DEGERE A MEL Cei aep ditur 385 140 DDO 885 00 Parameter 387 Chapter 39 140 DAO 840 00 24 230 VAC 16x1 OUT Module
101. Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 288 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 740 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 740 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fa 8 Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 740 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 289 140 DAI 740 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 740 00 wiring diagram RETURN 1 RETURN 2 e OO So D OE 09 109 RETURN 8 2 9 un RETURN 12 moe m 890 NOTE This module is not polarity sensitive N C Not Connected NPUT 10 NPUT 11 NPUT 12 N C NPUT 13 NPUT 14 NPUT 15 NPUT 16 NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 290 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 740 00 Specifications General Specifications General S
102. Specifications Bw A EA E REPE 219 Parameter 221 Chapter 20 140 DDI 853 00 10 60 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module 223 Presentation iced RE lt Sea E Ne etras 224 Indicators c5irccberrceRPEDCCASew pex OSSA PRaEUR HIELO 225 Wiring Diagram gt Re En btt Run d RS AUR ER Re 226 Specifications reve aks eR HR oe hd ore dun 227 Parameter 229 Chapter 21 140 DAI 340 00 24 VAC 16x1 IN Module 231 Presentation bk RR c e amd 232 Indicators FT ER 233 Wiring Diagram ores cd eae FP we A a 234 Specifications cR ere Ep b Ever be 235 Parameter 237 Chapter 22 140 DAI 353 00 24 VAC 4 8 IN Module 239 Presentation ove un tede e xm reb ool end 240 Indicators i ii Less nit ned x Reti pl iubet e etus 241 Wiring Diagtaim nutem et rr tee ire eee E E 242 Lx e rio er READ alas UR PE EUR ANUS 243 Parameter Configuration 245 Chapter 23 140 DAI 440 00 48 16x1 IN Module 247 Presentation inpet toda eet IMPO PRSE 248 IndiCators IE ale ua ici det iue ER DRE ROUES 249 Wiring Diagram eh EI eee ee Dac eps 250 Specifications x
103. Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 IN 16 groups x 1 point individually isolated External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 5 5 W max Bus Current required 180 mA map 1 input word Fault Detection None Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 47 58 Hz ON 18 30 VAC 10 7 mA max OFF 0 5 VAC 57 63 Hz ON 16 30 VAC 12 mA max OFF 0 6 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 1 9 mA from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition Typical Input Impedance Typical Imput Impedance 50 Hz 3 1 kohms capacitive 60 Hz 2 6 kohms Isolation Isolation Input to Input 1780 VAC for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute 35010516 05 2010 235 140 DAI 340 00 Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 30 VAC 10s 32 VAC 1 Cycle 50 VAC Response Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes 236 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 340 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AC IN 24V 2x8
104. The following figure shows the 140 DAI 553 00 wiring diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 1 INPUT 4 INPUT 3 INPUT 6 INPUT 5 INPUT 8 INPUT 7 GROUP A COMMON INPUT 10 INPUT 9 INPUT 12 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 INPUT 13 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 GROUP B COMMON N C I INPUT 18 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 INPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON N C INPUT 26 INPUT 25 INPUT 28 INPUT 27 INPUT 30 INPUT 29 INPUT 31 INPUT 32 66 9 696 69 6 9 99 9 9 O 9 amp 5 amp 6 65 65 0 9 O 0 OO GROUP D COMMON N C 1 N C Not Connected 2 This module is not polarity sensitive 3 When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Ensure that all inputs in a group are from the same phase of line input voltage Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 282 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 553 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 IN 4 groups x 8 points External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 10 9 W
105. VAC rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection internal Transient voltage suppression 36 V 35010516 05 2010 351 140 DDO 353 10 Response Resistive Loads Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1 ms max ON OFF 1 ms max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance max 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or _ 05 where L Load inductance henry L 17 Load current F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance max 50 uF Tungsten Load max 12W 24V 352 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 10 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal 5 A fuse for each group For the location of the fuses see figure below External The internal fuse protects a group but not each output switch for all possible overload conditions The user must protect each point with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse A CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm po
106. b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot 35010516 05 2010 41 Addressing Modes Configuration for Discrete Output Modules Overview This section provides information on configuration of 8 12 16 32 and 96 point output modules 8 Point Output Modules The following shows the 8 point output module e 140 DRC 830 00 Relay Ouput 8x1 Normally Open Normally Closed Flat Addressing The ouput modules listed above can be configured as either eight contiguous discrete M output references or as one MW output word For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 8 Point Output Modules Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Output 1 9eQ Wo eVr m 1 Value Output 2 9eQ WVo eVr m 2 Value Output 7 9eQ WVo eVr m 7 Value Output 8 9eQ Wb eVr m 8 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Outputword 1 QW b e R S 1 1 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot I O Map Status Byte There is no I O Map status byte associated with these modules 42 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes 12 Point Output Module The 12 point output module is e 140
107. be in accordance with National Source 6 Chassis Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 Ground Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations 62162 Source 7 Instrumentation Part I Intrinsic Safety V Sense 7 4 V Sense 7 S N C the requirements of ANSIASA 582 01 6 Is 8c Note 9 No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval Note 10 For Schneider Electric internal use only For control sheet refer to 19 100986 Rev D 1 5 Module All 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip Note 7 Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms Note 8 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets 3 Wire D Resistor Note 11 For Div 2 installation the apparatus shall be installed in compliance with the enclosure mounting spacing and nnection segregation requirements of the ultimate application including Chassis access only by the use of a tool and provision for Division 2 Ground wiring methods 524 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with IS RTD TC IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below The entit
108. digital signals that is transferred to the PLC Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DII 330 00 module and its components 140 7 e Ort i Ny oll Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door oahwnd 574 35010516 05 2010 140 DII 330 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DII 330 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DII 330 00 module LEDs Color Indication When On Active Green Bus communication is present 1 8 Green The indicated point or channel is on 35010516 05 2010 575 140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagrams Celenec Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a Celenec certified wiring diagram for this module CENELEC Hazardous Location CERTIFICATION Non Hazardous Location Zone 1 Entity Parameters Group IIA IIB IIC per channel SEE NOTE 1 0 9 6 lo 80 mA ch LS 8 192 mW ch 1 5 Field Co 450 nf ch Device Lo 694 pH ch Chass
109. door and label 58 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 030 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ACI 030 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 Description The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ACI 030 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected Diagnostic 1 Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED To avoid this occurrence please wire unused channels in voltage mode to a channel that is in use 2 This module produces an error signal F if any channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4 20 mA range or a under voltage condition in the 1 5 V range 35010516 05 2010 59 140 ACI 030 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration 4 CAUTION UNWIRED INPUTS CAUSE INAVLID READINGS When configured for voltage inputs no jumper installed between INPUT and ISENSE terminals if a broken field wire occurs readings will be non zero and not predictable The field wiring terminal strip must not be removed when the module is operating Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 60 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 030 00 The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 ACI 030 module INPUT 1 4 Jumper SENSE 1 INPUT
110. e Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output Use an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent in parallel with the switch Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE The output protection is composed of an RC filter snubber filter and a varistor e The snubber filter is optional The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the device used e Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage required by the device used 35010516 05 2010 413 140 DAO 842 10 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 OUT 4 groups x 4 points External Power 85 253 VAC Power Dissipation 1 85 W 1 1 V x Total module load Currents Bus Current required Module 350 mA map 1 output words Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of field power Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input 10s 300 VAC 1 Cycle 400 VAC Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 85 253 VAC ON State Drop Point 1 5 VAC Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point 4 0 A continuous 85 132 VAC rms 3 0 A continuous 170 253 VAC rms Each Group 4 0 A continuous Per Module 16 A continuous see the chart below
111. field wire length is a function of the required accuracy Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area RTD Resistance Input Wiring When the Universal Input module is configured as a RTD Resistance Input module the maximum wire length distance to a sensor for a 3 or 4 wire configuration is 200 meters Thermocouple Millivolt Input Wiring When the module is configured as a Thermocouple Millivolt Input module the sum of thermocouple source or voltage source impedance and wire resistance should not exceed 200 ohms for rated accuracy Fixed Wiring System The Quantum140 All 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin fixed position blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment The module s 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the insertion of an inappropriate connector in the module The following table provides the keying assignment Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Intrinsically Safe 140 All 330 00 CDF ABE 528 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 Specifications RTD Resi
112. fixed position blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment The module s 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module The keying assignment is given below Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Intrinsically Safe 140 AIO 330 00 CEF ABD 558 35010516 05 2010 140 AIO 330 00 Specifications General Specifications Specifications for the Quantum 140 AIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module are as follows Number of Channels 8 OUT Loop Resistance 500 ohms maximum Ranges 4 20 mA 0 to 4095 4 20 mA 0 to 16000 0 20 mA 0 to 20000 0 25 mA 0 to 25000 Resolution 15 bits within 4 20 mA Accuracy Drift Typical 40 C w Temperature Maximum 70 Accuracy Error 25 0 2 of full scale Linearity 1 LSB Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 VAC RMS for 1 minute Update Time 4 ms for all channels Settling Time 1 ms to 0 1 of the final value Bus Current Required 2 5 Amps Power Dissipation 12 5 W External Power Not required for this module Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 20 mA ran
113. follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS Protect each output with an external 5 A fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87 Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS e Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common single phase AC power source e Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output Use an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent in parallel with the switch Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE The output protection is composed of an RC filter snubber filter and a varistor e The snubber filter is optional The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the device used e Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage required by the device used 35010516 05 2010 403 140 DAO 840 10 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 OUT isolated External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 1 85 W 1 1 V x Total module load Currents Bus Current required Module 350 mA map 1 output word Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input
114. for the 140 DDO 153 10 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 153 10 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 319 140 DDO 153 10 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 153 10 wiring diagram OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 TTL Inverter p OUTPUT 4 4 OUTPUT 3 TTL Nand Gate OUTPUT 6 8 OUTPUT 5 7 p OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT 7 GROUP A SUPPLY 19 GROUP A COMMON OUTPUT 10 D OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 12 D OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 16 D OUTPUT 15 18 GROUP B SUPPLY GROUP B COMMON OUTPUT 18 OUTPUT 17 OUTPUT 20 TPUT 19 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 24 7 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C SUPPLY GROUP C COMMON OUTPUT 26 62 61 OUTPUT 25 OUTPUT 28 6 OUTPUT 27 OUTPUT 30 65 OUTPUT 29 OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT 31 GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP D COMMON x US 5 Vdc NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 320 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 153 10 Specifications General Specifications Input Rating General Spec
115. if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 1 Value 2 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State USER DEFINED 35010516 05 2010 365 140 DDO 364 00 366 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 843 00 10 60 VDC 2x8 Source OUT Module 37 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 843 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 368 Indicators 369 Wiring Diagram 370 Specifications 371 Maintenance 373 140 DDO 843 00 Parameter Configuration 375 35010516 05 2010 367 140 DDO 843 00 Presentation Function The DC Output 10 60 VDC 2x8 Source module switches 10 60 VDC powered loads and is for use with shared ouput common wired to 0 V External power supplies may be mixed between groups Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 843 00 module and its components O e 6 2 o IR Omna NEU S E 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 C
116. indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 339 140 DDO 353 01 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 01 wiring diagram GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 16 GROUP B SUPPLY OUTPUT 18 OUTPUT 20 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 24 GROUP C SUPPLY OUTPUT 26 OUTPUT 28 OUTPUT 30 OUTPUT 32 GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP A COMMON OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON OUTPUT 17 OUTPUT 19 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON m OUTPUT 25 4 amp amp amp E O GROUP D COMMON OUTPUT 27 D II FIELD OUTPUT 29 DEVICE OUTPUT 31 340 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 01 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16
117. m 1 2 Range warning Input 8 9elIW W o eVr m 8 Value 9el Vo eV r m 8 1 Broken wire or Out of range 9el Vo eV r m 8 2 Range warning Status Word IW b e r m 9 Status of input channels Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot IODDT The 140 ARI 030 10 Input Module uses the T ANA IN VE IODDT IODDT Name Object Data Type Name T ANA IN VE 9eCH W eWr m c ANA IN VWE userdefined 9elWr m c 0 Int VALUE 9elr m c 1 Bool ERROR 9elr m c 2 Bool WARNING Used abbreviations r rack m module slot c channel b bus e equipment drop Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off NOTE In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for 1 and 30 35010516 05 2010 87 140 ARI 030 10 I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 ARI 030 10 Input Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 6 5 4 3 1211 Channel 1 short circuit or out of range Channel 2 short circuit or out of range Channel 3 short circuit or out of range L Channel 4 short circuit or out of range Channel 5 short circuit or out of range Channel 6 short circuit or out of range Channel 7 short circuit or out of range Channel 8 short circuit or out of range 88 35010516 05 2010 140 ARI 030 10 Para
118. mA range 35010516 05 2010 71 140 ACI 040 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration Wiring diagram for the 140 ACI 040 00 Module INPUT 1 INPUT 1 Differential INPUT 2 8 INPUT 2 A furem INPUT 3 INPUT 3 7 4 See Ended INPUT 5 INPUT 5 a sae INPUT 6 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 8 mm per 9 4 4 INPUT 10 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 12 N C G INC INPUT13 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 14 4 INPUT 15 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 INPUT 16 N C N C 72 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 040 00 External Wiring Recommendations 1 The user supplies the current and voltage sources installation and calibration of fuses are at the discretion of the user 2 Use shielded signal cable In noisy environnements twisted shielded cable is recommanded 3 Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC s ground 4 A Shield Bar STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010 3020 should be used to connect the shielded cable to ground see Quantum with Unity Pro Hardware Reference Manual 5 The maximum channel to channel working voltage cannot exceed 30 Vdc 6 Not connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 73
119. max Bus Current required 250 mA map 2 input words Fault Detection None Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 50 Hz ON 85 132 VAC 11 1 mA max OFF 0 20 VAC 60 Hz ON 79 132 VAC 13 2 mA max OFF 0 20 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 2 1 mA from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition Typical Input Impedance Typical Imput Impedance 50 Hz 14 4 kohms capacitive 60 Hz 12 kohms capacitive Isolation Isolation 1780 VAC for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute Group to Group 35010516 05 2010 283 284 140 DAI 553 00 Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 132 VAC 10s 156 VAC 1 Cycle 200 VAC Response Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes NOTE Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 553 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AC IN 115V 4x8 f Config Par
120. mm ee adopter deeds eMe E LOUP ner ened 458 lascio 459 Wiring Diagram Den Dente pen 460 Specifications PS Mahi sakes NAE bates iata 461 Maintenance gt n Re 463 Addressing sft um eU Beene eee iene es 464 Parameter 466 Part VII Discrete IN OUT Modules 469 Chapter 47 471 Discrete I O Logic lt 471 Chapter 48 140 DDM 390 00 24 VDC 2x8 Sink IN 2x4 Source OUT xs in ais s or dne Cre doe Re de Cl 473 Presentation eee We E ER ee per nds 474 Indicators 5 wees RR Toy a eRe oe EP 475 RIO Drop Location 476 Wiring Diagram Rb ene oh pS 477 cnc ppc tae hh ee eed ee ed WES toes 479 Maintenance sesclc4e gsm eee Ee 481 140 DDM 390 00 Parameter 483 Chapter 49 140 DDM 690 00 125 VDC High Power IN OUT Module 485 Presentations isi bees e Bf ke RR tlie ERES 486 Indicators cit rt pata eed Reed 487 Wiring Diagram iex d iere m eee xo Dx A RO E Es 489 Specifications ics gu Pah ERR eR els 491 140 DDM 690 00 Parameter 494 12 35010516 05 2010 Chapter 50 Part VIII Chapter 51 Ch
121. negative outputs 1 through 8 are internally connected to Intrinsically Safe 1 5 ground Note 3 Pins marked N C are not electronically con nected to the module Note 4 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 back plane should be used when mounting this module 35010516 05 2010 567 140 DIO 330 00 FM Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module Non Hazardous Location Output 1 N C Output 2 N C Output 3 N C Output 4 N C N C N C N C Output 5 4 N C Output 6 LS 24 VDC NO LOAD Output 1 Hazardous Location Class Div Group A B C D Class II Div Group E F G Class Ill Div See Notes 1 amp 2 Pond Notes Related to FM Certification This LS field device should meet Note 5 or be FM approved with the Entity Concept as oulined in Note 4 N C Output 2 Output 3 N C Output 4 N C N C N C N C Output 5 N C Output 6 N C Output 7 N C Output 8 N C Output 7 N C Output 8 1 5 Module DIO 330 00 Blue Terminal Ground appropriate for connection with the I S RTD TC IN module with the Concept parameters listed below LS Field Device Entity parameters provided are per channel Voo 27 9 Vde lsc 121 mA ch C4 84 nf ch La 2 2 mH ch P 840
122. oec Beeps eee PRE REI RENE PUMP 251 Parameter 253 Chapter 24 140 DAI 453 00 48 VAC 4 8 IN Module 255 Presentation cL ee eb he ee ee ede 256 IndiCators ue te det auras act ated RA FE dedere E 257 Wirlng DIiagratm 2 2 she e Ep REP Rue eX E Se UE eos 258 Specification Siei boca ns exp VER VR EN ecu E REI Ras 259 Parameter 261 35010516 05 2010 Chapter 25 140 DAI 540 00 115 VAC 16x1 IN Module 263 Presentatiom eret p n E hates arsine ined eevee ate 264 INGICALONS PT 265 Wiring Diagram ceci gne cb hes eter xm ex EE edi xls 266 Specifications i ccc LR sme RR ae eS Y 267 Parameter 269 Chapter 26 140 DAI 543 00 115 VAC 2x8 IN Module 271 Presentation ic css 272 Indicators ess eae din rete 273 Wiring remettre eg een dx E Peek ete es 274 amp ere DR ee ba ee 275 Parameter 277 Chapter 27 140 DAI 553 00 115 VAC 4x8 IN Module 279 Presentation sermo iae cbe un Rx ERE 280 Indicators cepe E eee ee eee QV a eee es 281 Wiring Diagram 1 RR RR 282 Specifications E ae bed ed
123. or under voltage on channel 8 1 Broken wire or under voltage on channel 7 1 Broken wire or under voltage on channel 6 1 Broken wire or under voltage on channel 5 1 Broken wire or under voltage on channel 4 1 Broken wire or under voltage on channel 3 1 Broken wire or under voltage on channel 2 Topological Addressing 1 Broken wire or under voltage on channel 1 Topological addresses for the 140 ACI 030 00 Input Module Point Object Comment Input 1 9elIW Wo eVr m 1 Value l b e r m 1 1 Broken wire or under voltage Input 8 9eIW Wo eVr m 8 Value l b e r m 8 1 Broken wire or under voltage Status Word W b e r m 9 Status of input channels Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot 35010516 05 2010 65 140 ACI 030 00 IODDT I O Map Status Byte The 140 ACI 030 00 Input Module uses the T ANA IN VE IODDT IODDT Name Object Data Type Name T ANA IN VE 9eCH W eVr m c ANA IN VWE userdefined Wr m c 0 Int VALUE 9elr m c 1 Bool ERROR Used abbreviations r rack m module slot c channel b bus e equipment drop Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off NOTE In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for l and Q The I O map status byte is used by t
124. referred to the approval agencies listed 516 35010516 05 2010 140 All 330 00 Safe Analog IN Module 52 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 All 330 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 518 Indicators 519 Wiring Diagrams 520 Specifications 529 Addressing 532 Parameter Configuration 535 35010516 05 2010 517 140 AII 330 00 Presentation Function Illustration The Quantum 140 All 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module will interface with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs which are software configurable on a module basis with either RTD Resistance or thermocouple millivolt inputs When it is configured as an RTD Resistance Input module it supports 100W 200W 500W and 1000W platinum American or European and nickel sensors The module also allows any mix and match of sensor type or resistance inputs that can be configured by the software When it is configured as a Thermocouple Millivolt Input module it accepts B J K E R S and T type thermocouples The module also allows any mix and match of thermocouple or millivolt inputs that can be configured by the software The following figure shows the 140 All 330 00 Intrinsically Safe module and its components ai1330 00
125. that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 176 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 153 10 Specifications General Specifications Isolation Input Rating General Specifications Module Type 32 IN 4 groups x 8 points Logic True Low External Power Us 4 5 5 5 VDC Bus Current required Module 170 mA Power Dissipation 5W I O map 2 input words Fault Detection None Isolation Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Input Rating ON Level voltage 0 8 VDC maximum ON Level current 4 0 mA Us 5 5 V and Uin ZO V OFF Level voltage 4 VDC min 9 Us 5 5 V 3 VDC min 9 Us 4 5 V OFF Leakage 200 uA Us 5 5 V and Uin 4 VDC Internal Pullup Resistor 7 5 kohm Input Protection Resistor limited Absolute Maximum Inputs Absolute Maximum Inputs Continuous 5 5 VDC 1 3 ms 15 VDC decaying pulse 35010516 05 2010 177 140 DDI 153 10 Response Response OFF ON 250 us max ON OFF 500 us max Fuses Fuses Internal Not required External User installed per local and national electrical codes Logic States Table The following tables shows the logic states for the DDI 153 10 module Input Voltage Input State LED 0 8 VDC ON ON 24 0 VDC Q
126. the Safety I O modules Diagnostics Analog Input Digital Input Digital Output Out of Range yes Broken Wire yes yes Field Power yes yes Overload yes NOTE Short circuit of the wiring is not detected for the input modules It is your responsibility to make sure that the modules are wired correctly see the Quantum with Unity Pro Discrete and Analog I O Reference Manual see page 3 In addition the Quantum Safety PLC provides diagnostics of the communication between Safety CPU and Safety I O modules for instance a CRC Thus it is not only checked that the data received are the data sent but also that the data are updated To handle disturbances for example by EMC effects which may temporarily corrupt your data you can configure a maximum accepted consecutive CRC error for each module ranging from 1 to 3 For a detailed procedure see the chapter Configuring Modules for Safety Projects see Unity Pro XLS Software Operating Mode Manual Safety PLC Specifics in the Unity Pro XLS Operating Mode Manual Safety PLC Specifics Diagnostics at Power Up At power up the I O modules perform an extended self test during about 30 seconds If these tests are unsuccessful the modules are not considered to be healthy and do not start The inputs and outputs are then set to 0 If the 24 VDC external power supply is not connected to the digital input or digital output modules the power up self tests d
127. where b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot c channel NOTE When addressing 1 The b e defaults to 1 1 in a local rack and does not need to be specified 2 The rank is an index used to identify different properties of an object with the same data type value warning level error level 3 The rank numbering is zero based and if the rank is zero omit the entry For detailed information on I O variables please refer to the Unity Pro Reference Manual Reading Values An Example To read Action input value rank 0 from channel 7 of an analog module Enter located in slot 6 of a local rack 1W1 6 7 0 input value rank 0 from channel 7 of an analog module Enter located in drop 3 of RIO bus 2 IWN2 3N1 6 7 0 out of range value rank 1 from channel 7 of an analog Enter module located in slot 6 of a local rack 11 6 7 1 0 35010516 05 2010 27 Addressing Modes IODDT Addressing IODDT Addressing An IODDT allows all information bits and registers related to a channel to be handled through a user defined variable This variable is defined in the Unity Pro data editor by selecting the appropriate IODDT for the module as a data type and specifying the topological address of the module using the following syntax SCH b e r m c where e b bus e e equipment drop e r rack e m module slot e channel Here is an example of an IOD
128. 0 140 DDO 843 00 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal 8A fuse time lag for each group External The internal fuse protects a group but not each output switch for all possible overload conditions The user must protect each point with a 2 A 250V fast acting fuse CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 2 A 250V fast acting fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 35010516 05 2010 373 140 DDO 843 00 Illustration The following figure shows fuse locations for the 140 DDO 843 00 module DDO 353 00 Fuse Locations NS Ea hy Hi e 374 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 843 00 140 DDO 843 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window DC OUT 10 60V 2x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING M OX v OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 TASK MAST
129. 0 notaccessible through 300210 temperature IODDT NOTE For the IODDT the data type T ANA IN VWE is used and the variable y Temp With the address CH1 5 10 was defined For comparison the register addressing as used with Concept is added in the last column As Concept does not support direct addressing of a bit in a word the bit extraction has to be performed in the user program 31 Addressing Modes Discrete I O Bit Numbering Introduction The numbering of channels of an I O module usually starts with 1 and counts up to the maximum number of supported channels The software however starts numbering with a O for the least significant bit in a word LSB The Quantum I O modules have their lowest channel mapped to the most significant bit MSB The following figure shows the mapping of I O channels related to the bits in a word Channels Bit numbering 11213 4 5 6 7 819 110 111 12 13 14 15 16 LSB Word Addressing Versus Bit Addressing Mainly discrete I O modules can be configured to deliver their I O data either in word format or in bit format This can be selected during configuration by selecting either IW SMW or SI SM If you need to access a single bit from an I O module configured to use an I O word you can use the syntax word bit The following table gives you the connection between I O point number and the associated I O address
130. 0 00 Analog Mixed Current Voltage IN Module 105 35010516 05 2010 55 Analog IN Modules 56 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 030 00 Analog Current Voltage IN Module 4 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information of the Quantum 140 ACI 030 00 Module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 58 Indicators 59 Wiring Diagram 60 Specifications 63 Addressing 65 Parameter Configuration 67 35010516 05 2010 57 140 ACI 030 00 Presentation Function The Analog Input 8 Channel Unipolar module accepts mixed current and voltage inputs Required jumpers between the input and sense terminals for current input measuring are included with the module Illustration The following figure shows the140 ACI 030 00 module and its components O 6 27 l Omna Stu Y o 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable
131. 0 VDC 20 mA each group Power Dissipation 7 W all points on Bus Current required Module 250 mA Operating Voltage and Current Operating Voltage and Current ON level current 2 5 mA min OFF level voltage 5 VDC OFF level current min 0 3 mA 1 2 mA Response Response OFF ON 2 2 ms ON OFF 3 3 ms Isolation Isolation Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute 35010516 05 2010 307 140 DSI 353 00 Open Circuit Monitoring Open Circuit Monitoring Broken wire detection OFF Current 0 15 mA Shunt resistor 56 kohms recommended Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes 308 35010516 05 2010 140 DSI 353 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires 64 contiguous input references 1 32 for input data and 32 for broken wire signal or 4 contiguous input words 1W 2 for input data and 2 for broken wire signal The data word formats are as follows Input Words Data Topological Addressing Word 1 Input 1 2 83 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 Point 1 MSB First Word Word 2 Input 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
132. 0 to 450 ohms Apt 1000 100 to 450 ohms Channel2 Channel8 see Channel1 90 35010516 05 2010 140 ATI 030 00 Analog TC IN Module About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 ATI 030 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 92 Indicators 93 Wiring Diagram 94 Specifications 97 Addressing 101 Parameter Configuration 103 35010516 05 2010 91 140 ATI 030 00 Presentation Function The140 ATI 030 00 is an 8 channel thermocouple input module Illustration The following figure shows the 140 ATI 030 00 module and its components 6 2 di er 5 NEU S E 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 92 35010516 05 2010 140 ATI 030 00 Indicators Illustration Description Diagnostic The following table shows the L
133. 010 299 300 140 DAI 753 00 Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 264 VAC 10s 300 VAC 1 Cycle 400 VAC Response Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes NOTE Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 753 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AC IN 230V 4x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT 9 1 1 INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 EB p BINARY M TASK MAST 11 2 140 DAIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 32 2 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 301 140 DAI 753 00 302 35010516 05 2010 140 DSI 353 00 24 VDC 2x16 Supervised IN Module 30 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DSI 353 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapte
134. 08 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 10 100 230 VAC 4x4 OUT Module 41 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAO 842 10 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 410 Indicators 411 Wiring Diagram 412 Specifications 414 Maintenance 417 140 DAO 842 10 Parameter Configuration 419 35010516 05 2010 409 140 DAO 842 10 Presentation Function The AC Output 100 230 VAC 4x4 module switches 100 230 VAC powered loads Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 10 module and its components G MI 6 2 o IR Omn p NEU Bo 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 410 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 10 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 842 10 module Descriptions The f
135. 0_000 Int IW100 2 2 0000_0000_0000_111 Int vel W100 3 0 IW100 4 Int 2 0000_0000_0011_111 Int W100 5 0 Int 221110066 Int IW100 7 Int IW100 8 Int 8 BIW 00 9 Int W100 10 Int swoon Int W100 12 Int W100 13 Int Wi100 14 Int eo ojojojojojojojojo IW100 15 Int gt Relation between Slot Input Word and Status Byte The byte related to the module is marked Slot Input Value Module Module Word 1 IW 0 0 Power Supply Status Byte 2 0 CPU no Status Byte 3 9eIW 1 241000 0000 0000 0000 CPU no Status Byte 4 231000 0000 0000 0000 AVI At least one channel is not operating correctly 5 9eIW 2 24 0000_0000_0000_1111 ATI Channels 1 4 are not operating correctly 6 2300000 0000 0000 1111 CRP no Status Byte 7 IW 3 0 Empty 8 0 Empty 9 9eIW 4 24 0000_0000_0011_1111 DDO All channels are not operating correctly 10 240000 0000 0011 1111 XBE no Status Byte 35010516 05 2010 35 Addressing Modes Configuration for Discrete Input Modules Overview This section provides information on configuration of 8 16 24 32 and 96 point input modules 8 Point Input Modules The 8 point input modules are e 140 DII
136. 1 mA max OFF 0 20 VAC 60 Hz ON 79 132 VAC 13 2 mA max OFF 0 20 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition 2 1 mA Typical Input Impedance Typical Input Impedance 50 Hz 14 4 kohms capacitive 60 Hz 12 kohms capacitive Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 132 VAC 10s 156 VAC 1 Cycle 200 VAC 35010516 05 2010 503 140 DAM 590 00 Response Inputs Response Inputs OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms NOTE Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency Maximum Voltage Output Maximum Voltage Output Continuous 85 132 VDC 10 sec 156 VDC 1 Cycle 200 VDC ON State Drop Point 1 5 VDC Maximum Load Current OFF State Leakage Maximum Load Current OFF State Leakage Each Point 4 A continuous Each Group 4 A continuous Per Module 8 A continuous see chart below for derating above 50 degree OFF State Leakage Point 2mA Q 115 VDC The following figure shows the 140 DAM 590 00 Operating Curve x E 9 8 7 5 TN 85 132V ms 4 3 2 2 1 V 40 45 50 55 60 E AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
137. 11 1 output energized on channel 12 1 output energized on channel 13 1 output energized on channel 14 1 output energized on channel 15 1 output energized on channel 16 622 35010516 05 2010 140 SDO 953 00S The following diagram shows the register of the second input word Bit 15 set to 1 means that there is an overload problem on channel 1 bit 14 set to 1 means that there is an overload problem on channel 2 and so on Word 2 __ 1 overload problem detected on channel 1 1 overload problem detected on channel 2 __ 1 overload problem detected on channel __ 1 overload problem detected on channel 4 1 overload problem detected on channel 5 __ 1 overload problem detected on channel 6 __ 1 overload problem detected on channel 7 1 overload problem detected on channel 8 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 413 12 1 0 1 overload problem detected on channel 9 1 overload problem detected on channel 10 1 overload problem detected on channel 11 1 overload problem detected on channel 12 1 7 overload problem detected on channel 13 1 overload problem detected on channel 14 1 overload problem detected on channel 15 1 overload problem detected on channel 16 NOTE In case of activation of the overload b
138. 150 VDC OFF Level voltage 0 36 VDC ON Level current 2 0 mA min OFF Level current 0 5 mA max Internal Resistance OFF State 73 8 kohms nominal ON State 31 6 kohms nominal Input Protection Resistor Limited Absolute Voltage max Continuous 156 VDC including ripple Response Response OFF ON 0 7 ms Default filter 1 5 ms Non default filter ON OFF 0 7 ms Default filter 1 5 ms Non default filter 35010516 05 2010 211 140 DDI 673 00 Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes Operating Curve Figure The following figure shows the 140 DDI 673 00 operating curve N Number of Points ON per Group AOD o N 125 Vdc gt 140 Vde M 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature C NOTE The following information baselines minimum version levels that will support this module Minimum Version Levels Operating Voltages The following table shows the minimum version level for the module products Products Minimum Version Level see User Action Required label illustration below CPUs and NOMs V02 20 Executive upgrade to V02 10 2 V02 20 None RIOs V02 00 Module upgrade 2 V02 00 and V02 20 Executive upgrade to V02 10 V02 20 None DIOs V02 10 Module upgrade 2 V02 10
139. 200 100 to 450 ohms Apt 500 100 to 450 ohms Apt 1000 100 to 450 ohms Channel2 Channel8 see Channel1 536 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 Parameter and Default values TC Parameter Configuration Window TC IS AN IN Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS WORD IW 3x 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 10 TASK MAST MODULE INPUT TC mV Y E MODULE RESOLUTION 1 0 Deg Y OUTPUT UNIT Centigrade Y COLD JUNCTION COMP On Board v Lz CHANNELS CHANNEL1 NOT INSTALLED No Y RAW OUTPUT AMPLIFIER 25 Y OPEN CIRCUIT TEST No La TYPE Undefined M CHANNEL2 HM CHANNI3S 1 CCHANNEL4 CHANNELS CHANNEL6 CHANNEL CHANNEL8 T1 Local 2 140 Al 35010516 05 2010 537 140 AII 330 00 Name Default Value Options Description Module Input RTD Resistance TC mV for Module Input RTD Resistance see Parameter and Default values RTD page 535 Module Resolution 1 0 Deg 0 1 Deg Output Unit Centigrade Fahrenheit Cold Junction Compensator On board Channel 1 Channel1 Not installed No Yes Raw Output Amplifier 25 100 Open Circuit Test No Yes Type Undefined J Gain 25 K Gain 25 E Gain 25 T Gain 100 S Gain 100 R Gain 100 B Gain 100
140. 25 32 35010516 05 2010 439 140 DAO 853 00 140 DAO 853 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window AC OUT 230V 4x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING 25M 0X bd OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 TASK MAST hd P P BINARY TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED VALUE 1 VALUE 2 TI Local Qy 2 140 DAQ Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT M Ox WORD MW 4X Output Starting 1 1 Address Output Ending 32 2 Address Output Type BINARY BCD Task Mast Fast fixed to Mast if module Grayed if module in other than local in other than local Timeout State Userdefined Hold Last Value Value 1 Value 2 0 0 65535 only if Timeout State Userdefined 440 35010516 05 2010 140 DRA 840 00 Relay 16x1 Normally Open OUT Module 44 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DRA 840 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 442 Indicators 443 Wiring Diagram 444 Specifications 445 140 DRA 840 00 Parameter Configuration 447 35010516 05 2010 441 140 DRA 840 00
141. 25 VDC 3x8 Sink IN Module 207 19 140 DDI 841 00 10 60 VDC 8x2 Sink IN Module 215 20 140 DDI 853 00 10 60 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module 223 21 140 DAI 340 00 24 VAC 16x1 IN Module 231 22 140 DAI 353 00 24 VAC 4x8 IN Module 239 23 140 DAI 440 00 48 VAC 16x1 IN Module 247 24 140 DAI 453 00 48 VAC 4x8 IN Module 255 25 140 DAI 540 00 115 VAC 16x1 IN Module 263 26 140 DAI 543 00 115 VAC 2x8 IN Module 271 27 140 DAI 553 00 115 VAC 4x8 IN Module 279 28 140 DAI 740 00 230 VAC 16x1 IN Module 287 29 140 DAI 753 00 230 VAC 4x8 IN Module 295 30 140 DSI 353 00 24 VDC 2x16 Supervised IN Module 303 35010516 05 2010 169 Discrete IN Modules 170 35010516 05 2010 General Information 13 Discrete I O Logic Circuits Discrete I O True High Figure The following is the true high current sink input current source output schematic Sip current gt _ power supply e L input output LOAD common al current current sink input current source output 35010516 05 2010 171 General Information Discrete I O True Low Figure The following is the true low current source input current sink output schematic power supply r power current supply L LOAD input WV output VW e C common 4 current a cu
142. 27 D INPUT 30 INPUT 29 5 INPUT 32 INPUT 31 59 1 Not Connected 2 When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Ensure that all inputs in a group are from the same phase of line input voltage Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 298 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 753 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 IN 4 groups x 8 points individually isolated External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 9 W max Bus Current required 250 mA map 1 input word Fault Detection None Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 50 Hz ON 175 264 VAC 9 7 mA max OFF 0 40 VAC 60 Hz ON 165 264 VAC 11 5 mA max OFF 0 40 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition 2 6 mA Typical Input Impedance Typical Imput Impedance 50 Hz 32 kohms capacitive 60 Hz 27 kohms capacitive Isolation Isolation Input to Input 1780 VAC for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute 35010516 05 2
143. 3 574 575 576 581 582 35010516 05 2010 Chapter 56 140 DIO 330 00 Safe Discrete OUT Module 563 Presentation esine toii aia IE Reg pes Da e s 564 Indicators e i esed DEAD E Ret len ye 565 Wiring Diagrams i enc eee mI b n VV e bx 566 Specification deitora ia E hak 571 140 DIO 330 00 Parameter 572 Part IX Quantum Safety I O Modules 583 Chapter 57 1 585 General Information on the Safety I O 586 Safety I O Modules 587 Chapter 58 140 SAI 940 00S Analog IN Module 589 Presentations iind peel koe Y eese x ee got e te 590 IndiCators ee a Cae RUE ER ROW ee ILE 592 Wiring Diagram 2e ks Rib RR R RE ROS 593 Specifications cssc E beta Ee 595 Addr ssiDg i hu iD E gu ener ROR E US 597 Parameter 600 Chapter 59 140 SDI 953 00S Digital IN Module 601 Presentations reor Rer Re Eee Roe PERS 602 Indicators chc Eee UA ECL IE Rae eels 603 Wiring Diagram op ern pue puer Xue IW euis 604 Specifications 5o aucem d put Dedi Len Ae riim 607 Addressing Tes iiaii pen eeu eae
144. 3 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 OUT 4 groups x 8 points Logic True High External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 1 60 W 1 0 V x Total module load Currents Bus Current required Module 320 mA map 2 output words Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input 10s 300 VAC 1 Cycle 400 VAC Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 20 253 VAC ON State Drop Point 1 5 VAC Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point 1 0 A continuous 20 253 VAC rms Each Group 4 0 A max Per Module 16 A continuous see chart below 436 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 853 00 The following figure shows the 140 DAO 853 00 Operating Curve DAO 853 00 Operating Curve 17 16 ES HE 15 MN 14 13 x E 12 11 EX X 10 o y 8 X a f o 6 5 Ns E X 4 o 3 R LE 2 1 0 A v 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C Frequency and Minimum Load Current NO POINT EXCEEDS 0 5A NO POINT EXCEEDS 1 0A Frequency 47 63 Hz Minimum Load Current 30 mA OFF State Leakage Point max OFF State Leakage Point max OFF State Leakage Point max 0 88 mA 230 V
145. 32 contiguous 3M references or as two MW words in the following format For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB First Word Output 112 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Point 1 MSB Second Word Output Point 17 Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 32 Point Output Modules Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Output 1 9eQ Wo eVr m 1 Value Output 2 9eQ WVo eVr m 2 Value Output 31 9eQ Wo eV r m 31 Value Output 32 Q b e r m 32 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Outputword 1 9eQW eVr m 1 1 Value Outputword 2 9eQW w eVr m 1 2 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot 46 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the modules as follows 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Groupt A Error Group B Error Group C Error C Group D Error Group A Point Error Group B Point Error 14000035301 Module Group C Point Error overload or short circuit L Group D Point Error Missing field power or blown fuses
146. 330 00 DC Input Intrinsically Safe Flat Addressing The input modules listed above can be configured as either 8 contiguous 1 references or as one IW word For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 8 Point Input Modules Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point V O Object Comment Input 1 9el No eV r m 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 Value Input 7 l b e r m 7 Value Input 8 l b e r m 8 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Inputword 1 IW b e r m 1 1 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot I O Map Status Byte There is no I O map status byte associated with these modules 36 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes 16 Point Input Modules The 16 point input modules are Flat Addressing 140 DAI 440 00 140 DAI 540 00 140 DAI 543 00 140 DAI 740 00 140 DDI 841 00 140 HLI 340 00 140 DAI 340 00 AC Input 24 Vac 16x1 AC Input 48 Vac 16x1 AC Input 115 Vac 16x1 AC Input 115 Vac 8x2 AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 DC Input 10 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink DC Input 24 Vdc 16 Sink Source The input modules listed above can be configured as either 16 c
147. 35010516 05 2010 199 140 DDI 364 00 Recommended Cables The following table shows recommended cables description and their length in meters Cable Part Number Description Length M TSXCDP301 1 HE 10 flying leads 3 TSXCDP501 1 HE 10 flying leads 5 TSXCDP102 2 HE 10 ribbon cable 1 TSXCDP202 2 HE 10 ribbon cable TSXCDP302 2 HE 10 ribbon cable TSXCDP053 2 HE 10 round cable 0 5 TSXCDP103 2 HE 10 round cable 1 TSXCDP203 2 HE 10 round cable 2 TSXCDP303 2 HE 10 round cable 3 TSXCDP503 2 HE 10 round cable 5 Compatible Connection Sub Bases The following tables shows the compatible connections sub bases Channels Type 8 ABE 7H08Rxx 8 ABE 7H08S21 16 ABE 7H16Rxx H16Cxx 16 ABE 7H168S21 16 ABE 7H16R23 16 ABE 7H16S43 with the splitter sub base ABE 7ACCO2 Compatible Input Adapter Sub Base 16 Channels ABE 7S16E2xx 7P 16F3xx 200 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 364 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 364 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 32 64 Act 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 364 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Act Green Bus communication is present
148. 35010516 07 Quantum with Unity Pro Discrete and Analog I O Reference Manual 05 2010 Schneider www schneider electric com Electric The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without express written permission of Schneider Electric All pertinent state regional and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements the r
149. 40 00 115 VAC 16x1 IN Module 25 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 540 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 264 Indicators 265 Wiring Diagram 266 Specifications 267 Parameter Configuration 269 35010516 05 2010 263 140 DAI 540 00 Presentation Function The AC Input 115 VAC 16x1 module accepts 115 VAC inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 540 00 module and its components 6 2 7 _ Ona N Nie _ 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 264 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 540 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 540 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 8 Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 The following table shows the LED descriptions
150. 40 ACO 130 00 Output Module Point Object Comment Output 1 9eQW w eVr m 1 Value Output 2 9eQW Wb eVr m 2 Value Output 7 9eQW W eVr m 7 Value Output 8 9eQW W eVr m 8 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 ACO 130 00 Output Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 16 5 4 13 2 1 Channel 1 loop broken wire Channel 2 loop broken wire Channel 3 loop broken wiree L Channel4 loop broken wire Channel 5 loop broken wire Channel 6 loop broken wire Channel 7 loop broken wiree Channel 8 loop broken wire 136 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 130 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AN OUT 8CH CURR m Config Parameter Name MAPPING Value OUTPUTS START ING ADDRESS WORD MW 4x 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS _ TASK 8 MAST CHANNELS B CHANNEL1 RANGE SELECTION 20 mA 0 4095 TIMEOUT STATE LAST VALUE TIMEOUT VALUE 0 CHANNEL2 CHANNELS CHANNEL4 CHANNELS CHANNEL6 CHANNEL F 8 1 LocalQj 2 140 acd Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD MW 4X Out
151. 40 USE 100 96 35010516 05 2010 140 ATI 030 00 Specifications General Specifications Range Resistance Filter General Specifications Module Type 8 Channel IN TC External Power Not required Operating Voltage Channel to Channel 220 VAC Q 47 63 Hz or 300 VDC max Bus Current required Module 280 mA Power Dissipation 1 5W map 10 input words Error Detection 8 red LEDs to indicate out of range or broken wire conditons Range TC Types Range degrees C J 210 760 K 270 1370 E 270 1000 T 270 400 S 50 1665 R 50 1665 B 130 1820 Millivolt Ranges Open circuit detect can be disabled on these ranges 100 mV 100 mV 25 mV 25 mV Resistance Filter TC Resistance Max Source Resistance 200 ohms for rated accuracy Input Impedance gt 1 Mohms Input Filter Single low pass nominal 20 Hz plus notch filter at 50 60 Hz 35010516 05 2010 97 140 ATI 030 00 Noise Rejection CJC Noise Rejection CJC Normal Noise Rejection 120 dB min 50 or 60 Hz Cold Junction Compensation CJC Internal CJC operates O 60 degrees C errors are included in the accuracy specification The connector door must be closed Remote CJC can be implemented by connecting a TC which monitors the external junctio
152. 5 5 Us OFF OFF gt 3 0 VDC 4 5 Us No Connection OFF OFF 178 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 153 10 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window DC IN 5V 4x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING 1 1 Y INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 P P BINARY M TASK MAST E M 1 LocalQU 2 140 DDI Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 32 2 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 179 140 DDI 153 10 180 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 353 00 24 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module 1 5 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 353 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 182 Indicators 1838 Wiring Diagram 184 Specifications 185 Parameter Configuration 187 35010516 05 2010 181 140 DDI 353 00
153. 5010516 05 2010 427 140 DAO 842 20 Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group 1000 VAC rms for 1 minute galvanically isolated Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection internal RC snubber suppression Response Response OFF ON 0 5 of one line cycle max ON OFF 0 5 of one line cycle max 428 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 20 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal 5 A fuse for each group For the location of the fuses see the figure below External User installed per local and national electrical codes 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 20 fuse locations 0 DDO 842 20 Fuse Locations Y e 13 16 35010516 05 2010 429 140 DAO 842 20 140 DAO 842 20 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window AC OUT 24 48V 4x4 5 Config TIMEOUT STATE Parameter Name Valuc MAPPING M OX ivi OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1
154. 6 05 2010 143 140 AVO 020 00 External Wiring Recommendation 1 When the green channel status LEDs are off the module is not generating outputs however an output may still be present if the master override signal is used 2 Master override is an input connected via an internal relay contact to the output when the module is not active If connected to an external source the master override input must be fused by a 1 16 A fuse 3 If the master override is not connected to an external source then it must be connected to common of that channel The master override relay transition time is typically 2 ms 4 The master override inputs must be from an external supply with a source impedance of 200 or tied to system common These inputs for channels that are in use should not be allowed to float and may be unique for each NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG NOTE The output levels of this module are either those generated within the module based on data inputs from the system or from the master override inputs on the field wiring terminal strip 144 35010516 05 2010 140 AVO 020 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 4 Channel OUT External Power Not required Bus Current required Module 700 mA Power Dissipation 4 5 W max map 4 output words
155. 6 05 2010 189 140 DDI 353 10 Presentation Function The 24 VDC 4x8 Source Input module accepts 24 VDC inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to 0 V Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 353 10 module and its components G MS 6 2 IR Omn p NEU Bo N 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 190 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 353 10 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 353 10 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 353 10 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 191 140 DDI 353 10 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 353 10 wiring diagram
156. AC 0 44 mA 115 VAC 0 18 mA 48 VAC 0 09 mA 24 VAC Surge Current max rms Surge Current max rms One Cycle 30 A per point Two Cycles 20 A per point Three Cycles 10 A per point Applied dV dT 400 V us 35010516 05 2010 437 140 DAO 853 00 Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection internal RC snubber protection Response Response OFF ON 0 5 of one line cycle max ON OFF 0 5 of one line cycle max 438 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 853 00 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal 4 A 250 V fuse For location of fuses see below External User installed per local and national electrical codes 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Illustration The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAO 853 00 module 140L 3 DDO 853 00 Fuse Locations Points 1 8 Points 9 16 Points 17 24 LN B c Points gt
157. ARY BCD Output Type BINARY BCD Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State USER DEFINED 388 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 840 00 24 230 VAC 16x1 OUT Module 39 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAO 840 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 390 Indicators 391 Wiring Diagram 392 Specifications 394 140 DAO 840 00 Parameter Configuration 397 35010516 05 2010 389 140 DAO 840 00 Presentation Function The AC Output 24 230 VAC 16x1 module switches 24 230 VAC powered loads Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 00 module and its components Dolan 6 2 1 o _ er 5 NEU Y Bo 1 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 390 35010516 05 2010
158. AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 341 140 DDO 353 01 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 OUT 4 groups x 8 points External Power 19 2 30 VDC Power Dissipation 5 W all points ON Bus Current required Module 250 mA max map 2 output word Fault Detection Group indication loss of field power Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 19 2 30 VDC ON State Drop Point 0 5 VDC 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Surge Current Maximum Load Current Surge Current Each Point 0 5A Each Group 4A Per Module 16A Surge Current max 2 A each point internally limited OFF State Leakage Point lt 0 1 mA 24 VDC Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection internal Thermal overload and short circuit 342 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 01 Response Resistive Loads Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 0 1 ms ON OFF 0 1 ms Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance max 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or 0 5 where L Load inductance henry E F Load current F Switching Frequency
159. Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 132 VAC 10s 156 VAC 1 Cycle 200 VAC 1 3 ms 276 VAC Response Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes NOTE Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 276 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 543 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AC IN 115V 2x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT l 1X INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 EB p BINARY M TASK MAST 11 2 140 DAIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 16 1 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 277 140 DAI 543 00 278 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 553 00 115 VAC 4x8 IN Module 27 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 553 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page
160. C 0 0015 of reading C max Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 VAC 47 63 Hz or 2500 VDC for 1 min 530 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 Update Time 1 sec all channels Fault Detection Out of range or broken wire conditions Bus Current Required 400 mA Power Dissipation 2W External Power Not required for this module Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible NOTE 1 Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC TC curvature offset plus gain for module temperature of 0 60 degrees C User supplied TC errors not included 2 For type J and K add 1 5 degrees C inaccuracy for temperatures below 100 degrees C Type B cannot be used below 130 degrees C 4 All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output This results in a reading 7FFFh or 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected 35010516 05 2010 531 140 All 330 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires ten contiguous 16 bit input words Iw eight for input data one for channel statu
161. Channel2 Channel8 see Channel1 538 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 10 Safe Analog IN Module 53 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 All 330 10 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 540 Indicators 541 Wiring Diagrams 542 Specifications 547 Addressing 548 Parameter Configuration 550 35010516 05 2010 539 140 AII 330 10 Presentation Function The Quantum 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module interfaces with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs which are software configurable The module accepts 0 20 mA 0 25 mA and 4 20 mA inputs The module allows any mix and match of current input ranges that can be configured by the software The module provides power to intrinsically safe transmitters located in hazardous areas Illustration The following figure shows the 140 All 330 10 Intrinsically Safe module and its components 140 ausson 2 01 14 Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it i
162. Chapter Chapter Name Page 9 140 ACO 020 00 Analog Current OUT Module 119 10 140 ACO 130 00 Analog Mixed Current OUT Module 129 11 140 AVO 020 00 Analog Mixed Voltage OUT Module 139 35010516 05 2010 117 Analog OUT Modules 118 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 020 00 Analog Current OUT Module 9 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 ACO 020 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 120 Indicators 121 Wiring Diagram 122 Specifications 124 Addressing 126 Parameter Configuration 127 35010516 05 2010 119 140 ACO 020 00 Presentation Function The Analog Output 4 Channel Current module controls and monitors current in 4 20 mA loops Illustration The following figure shows the 140 ACO 020 00 module and its components aco 02000 2 Gm Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The te
163. Comment Inputword 1 9elW W eVr m 1 1 Value Inputword 2 9elW Wo eVr m 1 2 Value Outputword 1 9eQW b eVr m 1 1 Value Outputword 2 9eQW W eVr m 1 2 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot The eight bits in the I O map status byte are used as follows 8 1716 15 4 1321 L Group A Voltage Error Group B Voltage Error Group C Voltage Error Group D Voltage Error Group A Miscompare Group B Miscompare Group C Miscompare Group D Miscompare The voltage error bit is set when the field supply is not present or the group fuse is blown The miscompare bit is set when any point within the group does not match its commanded state 35010516 05 2010 465 140 DVO 853 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window Verified Output 10 30 V Config Parameter Name MAPPING BIT 1 1x M 0X INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 31 OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 31 TASK MAST OUTPUT SHUTDOWN STATE DISABLE mes UTOMATIC RESTART NO GROUP 1 STATUS INPUT VERIFIED FAIL STATES DISABLED USER DEFINED GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 Ti Local QU 2 140 DV 466 35010516 05 2010 140 DVO 853 00
164. DC 0 020A No Ragiy is required for loop voltage less than 30 VDC Internal Voltage Drop 7 VDC min 30 VDC max 20 mA Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 20 mA range or over range or under range in bipolar modes only Resolution Conversion Resolution Conversion Resolution 12 bit Accuracy Error at 25 degrees C 0 20 of full scale voltage mode Accuracy Error 0 60 degrees C Typical 0 004 of full scale Maximum 0 07 of full scale Linearity Monotonic 1 LSB Update Time 15 ms for 2 Channels Settling time 900 micro sec to 0 1 of final value Fault Detection Open circuit indicator light and status byte A range warning is issued when a channel input is outside the rated input value Warning bits stay on after out of range bits are set An out of range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2 4 Out of range bits are also set if inputs drop below 0 5V 1 5V mode or 2 08 mA 4 20 mA mode 35010516 05 2010 161 140 AMM 090 00 Isolation Isolation Channel to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute 750 VDC rms for 1 minute Channel to Channel 500 VAC rms for 1 minute 750 VDC rms for 1 minute Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Table The following table shows the specifications for the voltmeter monitor for the analog input output module Range 1 5
165. DDO 885 00 Flat Addressing Error Inputs The Error Inputs of the 140 DDO 885 00 can be configured as either 16 contiguous references or as one IW word For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB 1 21314 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 12 Point Error Inputs Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point Object Comment Input 1 9el Vo eV r m 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 Value Input 11 l b e r m 11 Value Input 12 l b e r m 12 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point Object Comment Inputword 1 lW b e r m 1 1 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot Flat Addressing Outputs The 140DD088500 can be configured as one Mw output word in the following format For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete Bit Numbering page 32 MSB 112 3 4 5 6 7 1011 12 35010516 05 2010 43 Addressing Modes Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 12 Point Output Modules Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point V O Object Comment
166. DEGREES e 504 35010516 05 2010 140 DAM 590 00 Maximum Surge Current Min Load Current Maximum Surge Current Min Load Current One Cycle 30 A per point 45 A per group Two Cycle 20 A per point 30 A per group Three Cycle 10 A per point 25 A per group Min Load Current 5mA 0 5 of one line cycle max 400 V micro sec Response Response OFF ON ON OFF Applied DV DT Isolation Isolation Group to Group 1000 VAC for 1 minute Input or Output to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute 35010516 05 2010 505 140 DAM 590 00 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Input Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes Output Internal 5 A fuse for each group For the location of the fuses see figure below External User installed per local and national electrical codes 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module sensors and pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS Protect each group with a 5 A 250 V fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result i
167. DI 364 00 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast IN Module 1 7 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 364 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 198 Indicators 201 Color Codes 202 Specifications 203 Parameter Configuration 205 197 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 364 00 Presentation Function The 140 DDI 364 00 sink module accepts 24 VDC inputs 198 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 364 00 Illustration The front view of the 140 DDI 364 00 input module including terminal assignment numbers 140 DDI 364 00 24 VDC IN 6x16 Sink 32 64 1 9 17 25 2 10 18 26 3 1l 19 27 4 12 20 28 5 13 201 29 6 14 22 30 7 15 23 31 8 16 24 32 D A 149 150 101 102 pr m m4 Pushbutton 153 154 105 106 155 156 107 108 157 158 109 159 160 Ill I2 161 162 I13 163 164 115 16 NC COM INC COM NC COM INC COM E 165 166 n7 I8 167 168 I19 120 169 170 121 122 171 172 123 124 173 I4 I25 I26 175 176 127 128 177 rs 129 130 179 180 131 132 NC COM NC COM NC COM INC COM 181 182 D3 B4 183 184 135 136 185 186 137 I8 187 188 139 140 189 190 141 142 191 192 143 144 193 194 145 146 195 196 147 148 NC COM NC COM NC COM NC COM
168. DT for a thermocouple input module in slot 4 of a local rack f Data Editor Variables DDT Types Function DFBTypes r Filter Name x Yi EDT DDT M lODDT Name Type Adress Value Comment M My Temp Pointi T_ANA_IN_VWE CD Channel 1 Data VALUE Int aT Temperatur Value ERROR Bool 11 4 1 1 Out of Range WARNING Bool l1 4 1 2 Range Warning Note Only CH1 4 1 needs to be entered The topological addresses related to this channel 81W and 1 are generated automatically Variables in the User Program You can access all information related to channel 1 of the module using the following variables e My Temp Pointl VALUE forthe measured value e My Temp Pointl ERROR indicating an out of range condition e My Temp Pointl WARNING indicating an over range condition 28 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Quantum IODDTs Introduction Unity Pro provides a couple of IODDTs which are either generic and can be used for several I O modules or belong to one specific module NOTE Deviating from the general description of the data types in the Direct Addressing Data Instances chapter in the Unity Pro Reference Manual in Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for 1 and Q T ANA IN VE T ANA IN VEis used with all channels of the f
169. ED OUTPUT CHANNEL1 LAST VALUE 52 VALUE 0 CHANNEL2 LAST VALUE M 166 35010516 05 2010 140 AMM 090 00 Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3X MW 4X Inputs Starting 1 Address Inputs Ending 4 Address Outputs Starting 1 z Address Outputs Ending 2 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module in AUXO module in other other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 Data Format 16 bit format Volt meter 12 bit format Input Range Channel1 NOT INSTALLED 10V TO 10V OV TO 10V 5V TO 5V OV TO 5V 1V TO 5V 20 mA TO 20 mA Channel2 Channel4 see Channel1 Output Channel1 LAST VALUE DISABLED USER DEFINED Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Channel USER DEFINED Channel2 see Channel1 35010516 05 2010 167 140 AMM 090 00 168 35010516 05 2010 Discrete IN Modules V Introduction What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters The following part provides information on the Quantum Discrete IN modules Chapter Chapter Name Page 13 General Information 171 14 140 DDI 153 10 5 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module 173 15 140 DDI 353 00 24 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module 181 16 140 DDI 353 10 24 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module 189 17 140 DDI 364 00 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast IN Module 197 18 140 DDI 673 00 1
170. ED indicators for the 140 ATI 030 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 00 A WN The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ATI 030 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 8 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 1 8 Indicated channel is out of range Broken wire condition is detected 1 All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output This results in a reading of 7FFF hexadecimal 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected 35010516 05 2010 93 140 ATI 030 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the 140 ATI 030 00 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 94 35010516 05 2010 140 ATI 030 00 External Wiring Recommendation 1 2 3 Use shielded TCs The user should consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment Shielded types should be connected to the PLC s ground A Shield Bar STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010 3020 should be used to connect the shielded cable to ground see Quantum with Unity Pro Hardware Reference Manual Connections marked Not Used are not el
171. Fault Detection Input None Over Current each point Input Rating Input Rating ON level voltage 88 156 VDC including ripple ON level current 2 0 mA min OFF leve voltage 0 36 VDC OFF level current 1 2 mA max Internal Resistance 24 kohms nominal Absolute Voltage max Continuous 156 2 VDC including ripple Input Response OFF ON ON OFF Input Response OFF ON ON OFF Default Filter 0 5 ms Non Default Filter 1 5 ms Voltage Output Voltage Output Operating Voltage max 19 2 156 2 VDC including ripple ON State Drop Point 0 75 VDC 4A 35010516 05 2010 491 140 DDM 690 00 Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point 4 A continuous Per Module 16 A continuous see the derating curve OFF State Leakage Point 1 2 mA 150 VDC Surge Current max Each Point 30 A 500 ms duration Output Response OFF ON ON OFF 0 2 ms max resistive load output The following figure shows the 140 DDM 690 00 Derating Curve 16A 8A Total Module CurrentT VA 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature C Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance max For switching intervals 2 15 seconds per ANSI IEEE C37 90 1978 1989 L lt 12 For repetitive switching 9 PF L lt
172. For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 Input 19 20 24 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Point 17 Input Poiti 2 3 4 15 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 113 14 15 16 MSB First Word MSB Second Word Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 32 Point Input Modules Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point Object Comment Input 1 9el Vo eV r m 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 Value Input 31 9el Vo eV r m 31 Value Input 32 l b e r m 32 Value 35010516 05 2010 39 Addressing Modes I O Map Status Byte Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point Object Comment Inputword 1 9elIW W5b eVr m 1 1 Value Inputword 2 9elW W5b eVr m 1 2 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot There is no I O map status byte associated with these modules 96 Point Input modules The following is the only 96 point input module e 140DDI36400 DC input 6 x 16 sink Flat Addressing The following information pertains to the 14000136400 Input module For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discr
173. Illustration The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DDO 353 00 module Lema DDO 353 10 Fuse Locations Ny eu 25 32 334 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 00 Parameter Configuration Window 140 DDO 353 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default Values DC OUT 24V 4x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING M OX M OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 TASK MAST BINARY TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED M VALUE 1 0 VALUE 2 0 11 Local QU 2 140 DDG Name Default Value Options Description Mapping M Ox WORD MW 4X Output Starting 1 1 Address Output Ending 32 2 Address Output Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 1 Value 2 0 0 65535 only if Timeout State USERDEFINED 35010516 05 2010 335 140 DDO 353 00 336 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 01 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module 3 4 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 353 01 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presen
174. MON 1A E E E OUTPUT 26 82 61 OUTPUT 25 Ny AN gt QUTPUT 28 63 OUTPUT 27 1 f OUTPUT 30 G5 OUTPUT 29 DEVICE OUTPUT 32 DD OUTPUT 31 GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP D COMMON D SUPPLY GROUP D COM CAUTION OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 350 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 10 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 OUT 4 groups x 8 points Logic True Low External Power 19 2 30 VDC Power Dissipation 2 0 W 0 4 V x Total load Current Bus Current required Module 330 mA max map 2 output word Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of field power Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 19 2 30 VDC 1 0 ms 50 VDC decaying pulse ON State Drop Point 0 4 VDC 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Surge Current Maximum Load Current Surge Current Each Point 0 5A Each Group 4A Per Module 16A Surge Current max 5 A 1 ms duration no more than 6 per miute OFF State Leakage Point 0 4 mA 30 VDC Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group 500
175. NOTE V is an optional voltmeter that can connected to read voltage that is proportional to the current Wiring to this terminal must not exceed 1 m NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG A 158 35010516 05 2010 140 AMM 090 00 Specifications General Specifications Operating Ranges Voltage Input General Specifications Module Type 4 Channel IN 2 Channel OUT isolated External Power Loop Voltage 30 VDC up to 60 VDC with an external resistor Bus Current required Module 350 mA Error Detection Open circuit in 4 20 mA range or over range or under range in bipolar modes only Operating Ranges Bipolar 10 VDC 5 VDC 20 mA Unipolar VDC 5 VDC 20 mA Unipolar with Offset 5 VDC 20 mA Voltage Input Operating Voltage Channel to 40 VDC max Channel Absolute Voltage max 50 VDC Linear Mesuring Range 2 4 over and under range Input Impedance in Range gt 10 Mohms Input Impedance over Range lt 0 5 Mohms 35010516 05 2010 159 140 AMM 090 00 Current Input Current Input Absolute Current max 25 mA Linear Measuring Range 2 4 over and 9 6 under range Input Impedance 250 ohms When configured
176. NPUT 2 NPUT 3 NPUT 4 N C NPUT 5 NPUT 6 NPUT 7 NPUT 8 N C NPUT 9 NPUT 10 NPUT 11 NPUT 12 N C INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 NOTE This module is not polarity sensitive Not Connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 250 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 440 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 individually isolated External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 5 5 W max Bus Current required 180 mA map 1 input word Fault Detection None Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 47 53 Hz ON 36 56 VAC 9 3 mA max OFF 0 10 VAC 57 63 Hz ON 34 56 VAC 11 mA max OFF 0 10 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 1 7 mA from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition Typical Input Impedance Typical Imput Impedance 50 Hz 6 8 kohms capacitive 60 Hz 5 6 kohms capacitive Isolation Isolation Group to Group 1780 VAC for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute 35010516 05 2010 251 252 140 DAI 440 00 Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input
177. ON Avoid erroneous outputs in this module by connecting the master override to an external source through a 1 16 amp in line fuse or connecting to circuit common Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 142 35010516 05 2010 140 AVO 020 00 The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 AVO 020 00 module COMMO OUTPUT 1 FIELD DEVICE COMMO R1 CONTROL 1 CHANNEL 4 JUMPERED MASTER OVER Jumper FORamov See REFERENCE 1 NOTE 1 COMMO N C Not Connected m Ta x N C COMMO OUTPUT 2 COMMO 5 Jumper R2 CHANNEL 2 MEE JUMPERED FOR 5V Jumper CONTROL 2 Normally Open when Typical one MASTER OVER REFERENCE 2 CH green LED ON of four See Normally 1 COMMO NIC i Open Channel COMMO OUTPUT 3 4 Output X J Nomally COMMO urnper Closed Master OVIUM Vid 90 ide X R3 CHANNEL 3 aL Manne LCONTROL MASTER OVER Jumper Master Override Relay Circuit Internal See REFERENCE 3 NOTE 1 COMMO NIC COMMON 4 OUTPUT 4 CHANNEL COMMO Jumper J NPERED xut FOR GTO 10 R4 See CONTROL 4 NOTE 1 FIELD MASTER OVER REFERENCE 4 ick COMMO 6 p N C C 116A gt EXTERNAL The external voltage source VOLTAGE is not required for standard SOURCE operation NOTE 1 see External Wiring Recommendation 3501051
178. OUP A RETURN N C N C N C GROUP A N C N C N C 8 amp 8 JOALE GROUP B N C N C N C GROUP B SUPPLY N C N C N C N C N C amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp S 6 8 5 5 9 OUTPUT 4 N C OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 8 te AN 99 yes ee s FIELD DEVICE OUTPUT 9 GROUP B RETURN QUTPUT 10 N C OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 N C 380 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 885 00 A CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS This module is not protected against reverse polarity Follow these precautions to avoid equipment damage e Do not reverse the polarity of the field power supply e To help protect the module against polarity miswiring add an external diode in series with each group supply line This diode must be able to support the group load current Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE N C Not Connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 381 140 DDO 885 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 12 OUT 2 groups x 6 points External Power None Power Dissipation 1 0 W 0 77 W x points ON Bus C
179. OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 TASK MAST vi BINARY M USER DEFINED 4 VALUE 0 m1 Local Qj 2 140 DAQ Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping 96M 0x WORD MW 4X Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 16 1 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Output Type BINARY BCD Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State USER DEFINED 430 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 853 00 230 VAC 4x8 Source OUT Module 4 3 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAO 853 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 432 Indicators 433 Wiring Diagram 434 Specifications 436 Maintenance 439 140 DAO 853 00 Parameter Configuration 440 35010516 05 2010 431 140 DAO 853 00 Presentation Function The AC Output 230 VAC 4x8 module accepts 230 VAC powered loads Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 853 00 module and its comp
180. Point Object Comment Input 1 9eIW Wb eVr m 1 Value 9el Vo eV r m 1 1 Broken wire or under voltage Input 16 9e6IW W b eVr m 16 Value 9el Vo eV r m 16 1 Broken wire or under voltage Status Word IW b e r m 17 Status of input channels Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot IODDT The 140 ACI 040 00 Input Module uses the T ANA IN VE IODDT IODDT Name Object Data Type Name T ANA IN VE 9eCH W eWr m c ANA IN VWE userdefined 9elWr m c 0 Int VALUE 9elr m c 1 Bool ERROR Used abbreviations r rack m module slot c channel b bus e equipment drop Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off NOTE In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for 1 Q I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 ACI 040 00 Input Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 6 5 1 L 1 Broken wire 35010516 05 2010 77 140 ACI 040 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configur ation Window AN IN 16CH CURR n Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD IW 3x INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 17 TASK MAST v
181. Presentation 280 Indicators 281 Wiring Diagram 282 Specifications 283 Parameter Configuration 285 35010516 05 2010 279 140 DAI 553 00 Presentation Function The AC Input 115 VAC 4x8 module accepts 115 VAC inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 553 00 module and its components 6 2 7 _ er NEU A 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 280 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 553 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 553 00 module Active 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 553 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 281 140 DAI 553 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration
182. RST 3 First Set Point signal l SP_SECOND 4 Second Set Point signal QW STOP_VALUE 1 For CNT_DIR 0 final set point value QW INITIAL_VALUE 2 For CNT_R 1 initial set point value Q LS 1 1 Counter load start controlled by the rising edge Q RSTART 2 1 Counter restart controlled by the rising edge Q OUT_OFF 1 Counter output switch off Q CNT_DIR 4 0 Counter counts up 1 Counter counts down Q OM1 5 Operating Mode bit 1 Q OM2 6 Operating Mode bit 2 Q OMS 7 Operating Mode bit 3 Q OMA 8 Operating Mode bit 4 30 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Addressing Example Comparing the 3 Addressing Modes The following example compares the 3 possible addressing modes An 8 channel thermocouple 140 ATI 030 00 module with the following configuration data is used e mounted in slot 5 of the CPU rack local rack e starting input address is 201 input word 1W201 e end input address is 210 input word 1W210 To access the I O data from the module you can use the following syntax Module data Flat Topological IODDT Addressing Concept Addressing Addressing Addressing Channel 3 IW203 IW1 5 3 My_Temp VALUE 300203 temperature Channel 3 IW209 5 9611 5 3 1 My Temp ERROR 300209 out of range Bit 5 to be extracted by user logic Channel 3 IW209 13 l1 5 3 2 My_Temp WARNING 300209 range warning Bit 13 to be extracted by user logic Module internal IW210 IW1 5 1
183. Rating ON Level voltage 15 30 VDC reference from group supply OFF Level voltage 0 5 VDC reference from group supply ON Level current 2 0 mA min 14 mA max OFF Level current 0 5 mA max Internal Resistance 2 4 kohm Input Protection Resistor Limited Absolute Maximum Inputs Absolute Maximum Inputs Continuous 30 VDC 1 3 ms 50 VDC decaying pulse 35010516 05 2010 193 140 DDI 353 10 Response Response OFF ON 1 ms max ON OFF 1 ms max Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes 194 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 353 10 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window 24VDC IN TRUE LOW 1 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT 9 1 1 M INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 EB p BINARY M TASK MAST M 1 Local Qy 2 140 DDI Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 32 2 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 195 140 DDI 353 10 196 35010516 05 2010 140 D
184. T BINARY Y TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED M VALUE 0 ut Local _ 2 140 DAG Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping M Ox WORD MW 4X Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 16 1 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Output Type BINARY BCD Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State USER DEFINED 35010516 05 2010 375 140 DDO 843 00 376 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 885 00 24 125 VDC 2x6 Source OUT Module 38 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 885 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 378 Indicators 379 Wiring Diagram 380 Specifications 382 Maintenance 385 140 DDO 885 00 Parameter Configuration 387 35010516 05 2010 377 140 DDO 885 00 Presentation Function The DC Output 24 125 VDC 2x6 Source module switches 24 125 VDC powered loads and is for use with shared ouput common wired to 0 V Illustration The following figure shows the
185. Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Outputword 1 9eQW W eVr m 1 1 Value Outputword 2 9eQW wb eVr m 1 2 Value Outputword 3 9eQW w eVr m 1 3 Value Outputword 4 9eQW W eVr m 1 4 Value Outputword 5 9eQW wb eVr m 1 5 Value Outputword 6 9eQW wb eVr m 1 6 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the module as follows 8 7 6 5 413 1211 Output 1 to 16 Error Output 17 to 32 Error Output 33 to 48 Error L Output 49 to 64 Error Output 65 to 80 Error Output 80 to 96 Error 48 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Configuration for Discrete Input Output Modules Overview This section provides information on configuration of 4 In 4 Out and 16 In 8 Out modules 4 Point Input 4 Point Output Module The following shows the 4 In 4 Out module e 140DDM69000 125 Vdc Input High Power Output Flat Addressing The 140DDM69000 input output module can be configured as either eight contiguous 1 references or as word and either eight contiguous 3M references or one MW word A CAUTION UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION INCORRECT I O MAPPING When I O mapping module inputs using discrete 1 references in remote drops do not split discrete words between drops The lowest discrete
186. Ue dad es doen d 283 Parameter 285 Chapter 28 140 DAI 740 00 230 VAC 16x1 IN Module 287 Presentation cest a ea PUE M RAET 288 Indicators rete Boe ODS d een tape EE aids va 289 Wiring Diagram 1 RII 290 Specifications siers as ubi 291 Parameter 293 Chapter 29 140 DAI 753 00 230 VAC 4x8 IN Module 295 Presentation veu RE epe inen 296 Indicators sni e Ex SE Re ei e use ius 297 Wiring DIagram 142 ederet eet ron Roh ro ye Ig a 298 Specifications eR wate ike GE ERES ES 299 Parameter 301 Chapter 30 140 DSI 353 00 24 VDC 2x16 Supervised IN Module 303 Presentation iesu ERES RAP RAPID e mue lE 304 Indicators oin e teer ete e eem ghe ntur tcs ate a 305 cuire coed Sete eed ME nee eua ig 306 Specifications Stak ta tia Ene Reman evi Pe hats 307 Addr ssing RI RE Ve ELA hed ee hee 309 Parameter 311 Part VI Discrete OUT 313 Chapter 31 1 315 Dis
187. V Loop current must be active Scaling Ioir mA x 0 250 Vo volts Output Impedance 300 ohms typical Maximum Wire Length 1 meter 162 35010516 05 2010 140 AMM 090 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires five contiguous 16 bit input words for input data one for channel status and 2 contiguous 16 bit output words OW for output data The data word formats are as follows The following shows the input words 1 4 Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 4 Channel 4 data The following shows the input word 5 Word 5 Input status word 1 Channel 1 input out of range __ 12 Channel 2 input out of range 12 Channel 3 input out of range __ 1 Channel 4 input out of range Reserved always 0 __ Reserved always 0 __ 1 Channel 2 output broken wire __ 1 Channel 1 output broken wire 1 213 4 15 16 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Range warning on channel 4 1 Range warning on channel 3 1 Range warning on channel 2 1 Range warning on channel 1 Not used always 0 A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value An out of range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rat
188. Y TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED M VALUE 0 T11 LocalQu 2 140 DAG Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping M Ox WORD MW 4X Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 16 1 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Output Type BINARY BCD Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State USER DEFINED 35010516 05 2010 419 140 DAO 842 10 420 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 20 24 48 VAC 4x4 OUT Module 42 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAO 842 20 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 422 Indicators 423 Wiring Diagram 424 Specifications 426 Maintenance 429 140 DAO 842 20 Parameter Configuration 430 35010516 05 2010 421 140 DAO 842 20 Presentation Function The AC Output 24 48 VAC 4x4 module switches 24 48 VAC powered loads Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 20 module and its components mosaz 6 2 1 o _ er 5 NEU Y B
189. Y v TASK MAST Y 1 Local Qy 2 140 DDI Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 32 2 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 229 140 DDI 853 00 230 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 340 00 24 VAC 16x1 IN Module 21 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 340 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 232 Indicators 233 Wiring Diagram 234 Specifications 235 Parameter Configuration 237 35010516 05 2010 231 140 DAI 340 00 Presentation Function The AC Input 24 VAC 16x1 module accepts 24 VAC inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 340 00 module and its components 00 O i Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 mus
190. abel Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 174 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 153 10 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 153 10 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 153 10 modul LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 175 140 DDI 153 10 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 153 10 wiring diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 4 INPUT 6 INPUT 8 GROUP A POWER INPUT 1 _ TTL mp INPUT 3 INPUT 5 GROUP B POWER INPUT 10 INPUT 12 INPUT 14 INPUT 16 eo N C INPUT 9 INPUT 11 INPUT 13 Open Collector INPUT 15 C9 9 9 OO N C INPUT 18 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 INPUT 23 GROUP C POWER Ne INPUT 26 INPUT 25 INPUT 28 INPUT 27 INPUT 30 INPUT 29 INPUT 32 INPUT 31 GROUP D POWER N C Us 5 VDC NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size
191. addresses for the 140 ATI 030 00 Input Module Point 1 0 Object Comment Input 1 9elIW Wo eVr m 1 Value 9el Vo eVr m 1 1 Out of range 9el Vo eV r m 1 2 Range warning Input 8 9elW Wo eVr m 8 Value 9el Vo eV r m 8 1 Out of range 9el Vo eV r m 8 2 Range warning Status Word 9elW Wo eVr m 9 Status of input channels Internal Temperature 9elW Wo eVr m 10 Internal module temperature Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot IODDT The 140AT103000 Input Module uses the T ANA IN VWE IODDT IODDT Name Object Data Type Name T ANA IN VWE CHf b e r m c ANA IN VWE userdefined Wr m c 0 Int VALUE 9elr m c 1 Bool ERROR 9elr m c 2 Bool WARNING Used abbreviations r rack m module slot c channel b bus e equipment drop Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off NOTE In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for l and Q I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 ATI 030 00 Input Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Channel 1 open circuit or out of range Channel 2 open circuit or out of range Channel 3 open circuit or out of range L Channel 4 open circuit or out of range Channel 5 open circuit or out of range L Channel 6 open circuit o
192. afety I O Modules IX Introduction The following part provides information on Quantum Safety Analog Digital I O Modules What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 57 General Information 585 58 140 SAI 940 00S Analog IN Module 589 59 140 SDI 953 00S Digital IN Module 601 60 140 SDO 953 00S Digital OUT Module 613 35010516 05 2010 583 Safety I O Modules 584 35010516 05 2010 General Information 57 Purpose This chapter provides general information on Safety Modules Read thoroughly the Quantum Safety PLC Safety Manual part number 33003879 to build a safety PLC according to the safety certifications What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page General Information on the Safety I O Modules 586 Safety I O Modules Diagnostics 587 35010516 05 2010 585 General Information General Information on the Safety I O Modules Introduction The following 3 Quantum Safety I O modules are certified for use in safety applications e 140 SAI 940 00S Analog Input e 140 SDI 953 008 Digital Input e 140 SDO 953 00S Digital Output The 3 Safety I O modules allow you to connect the Safety PLC to the sensors and actuators which are part of the Safety loop All of them are composed of 2 micro controller systems running the same program sharing the sam
193. al checking e Exchange number serial number of the set of data e Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC function used to detect errors after transmission 624 35010516 05 2010 140 SDO 953 00S Health Word The health word is an extra system control generated by the processor module using the data read from the output module Any of these errors activates the health word overload problem activates only the corresponding bit of the health word unsafe channel activates only the corresponding bit of the health word malfunction of the host SSD process power supply problem CRC error incorrect exchange number The following diagram shows the register of word 7 Word 7 1 Channel 1 OK 1 Channel 2 OK 1 Channel3 OK __ 1 Channel 4 OK 1 Channel 5 OK __ 1 Channel 6 OK __ 1 Channel 7 OK 1 Channel 8 OK 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 413 12 1 0 1 Channel 9 1 Channel 10 OK 1 Channel 11 OK 1 Channel 12 OK 1 Channel 13 OK 1 Channel 14 OK 1 Channel 15 1 Channel 16 OK Bit 15 to bit 0 These 16 bits are set to 1 when no error is detected 35010516 05 2010 625 140 SDO 953 00S Parameter Confi Modes of Operation guration The configuration of the 140 SDO 953 005 includes e Drop and Slot number automatically fille
194. am OUTPUT 1 4 Alurr t ay emi ihi OUTPUT 1 N C N C N C OUTPUT 1 2 OUTPUT Sourcing NIC OUTPUT 2 2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT Sinking OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 3 N C N C N C 2 N C N C N C OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 4 C OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 4 C N C N C l 425 yoo input 2 125VDC INPULI e e e il 495 VDC INPUT 4 125 VDC INPUT 3 e e N C N C N C N C INPUT GROUP B COMMON 1 N C Not Connected 2 Each output has two terminals for multiple wire connections 3 When field wiring the I O modules the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 489 140 DDM 690 00 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Do not reverse polarities of the output points Reverse polarity will turn an output point ON Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 490 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 690 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 4 IN 4 groups x 1 point 4 OUT isolated External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 0 4 W x 1 0 x number of input points ON 0 75 x total module outputs Currents Bus Current required Module 350 mA map 1 input word 1 output word
195. ameter Name Value MAPPING BIT 9 1 1 INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 EB p BINARY M TASK MAST 11 2 140 DAIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 32 2 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 285 140 DAI 553 00 286 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 740 00 230 VAC 16x1 IN Module 28 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 740 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 288 Indicators 289 Wiring Diagram 290 Specifications 291 Parameter Configuration 293 35010516 05 2010 287 140 DAI 740 00 Presentation Function The AC Input 230 VAC 16x1 module accepts 230 VAC inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 740 00 module and its components 6 2 _ er NEU A 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5
196. ance max Load Inductance max 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or 0 5 where L Load inductance henry L Load current A PF e F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance max 75 mF Tungsten Load max 2 5 W 10 VDC 3W Q 12 VDC 6 W 24 VDC Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppression internal overload short circuit protecton Response Response OFF ON 1 ms typical 2 ms max ON OFF 1 ms typical 2 ms max 462 35010516 05 2010 140 DVO 853 00 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal 5 0 Amp fuse per group External If desired a 3 4 A 250 V fuse 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DVO 853 00 module Fuse Locations dM ew DVO 853 00 Fuse Locations 35010516 05 2010 463 140 DVO 853 00 Addres
197. apter 52 Chapter 53 Chapter 54 Chapter 55 140 DAM 590 00 115 VAC 2x8 IN 2x4 OUT Module Presentation Indicators RIO Drop Location Wiring Diagram Specifications Maintenance 140 DAM 590 00 Parameter Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog Digital Modules General Information Purpose and Wiring Practices 140 All 330 00 Safe Analog IN Module Presentation Indicators Wiring Diagrams Specifications Addressing Parameter Configuration 140 All 330 10 Safe Analog IN Module Presentation Indicators Wiring Diagrams Specifications Addressing Parameter Configuration 140 AIO 330 00 Safe Analog OUT Module Presentation Indicators Wiring Diagrams Specifications Addressing Parameter Configuration 140 DII 330 00 Safe Discrete IN Module Presentation Indicators Wiring Diagrams Specifications Parameter Configuration 497 498 499 500 501 503 506 508 511 513 514 515 517 518 519 520 529 532 535 539 540 541 542 547 548 550 551 552 553 554 559 560 561 57
198. arameters Listed below The entity parameters are per Channel Voc 27 9 VDC 1 121 mA Ch C 84 nf Ch La 22 mH Ch P 840 mW Ch HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS DIV Il GROUP A B C D CLASS DIV GROUP A B C D CLASS II DIV GROUP F G CLASS Ill DIV I 1 5 48 uae once on PORE Input 1 4 Output 1 1 5 Field v Device N C N C Input 2 Input 2 Chassis Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections N C N C Ground Shields should be left open atthe field end and connected to chassis Input 3 Input 3 ground at the module end 3 9 0 Note 2 Pins marked are not electronically connected to the NIC NIC modile Note 3 mount modules of this type use only 140 00 Input 4 Input 4 backplanes Note 4 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of Intrinsically N C N C Safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Vos and lso N C N C for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to V max and Imax N C N C for the I S apparatus and the approved values of C and L for the associated apparatus must be equal to or greater than C and L for N C N C the I S apparatus plus all cable parameters Input 5 Input 5 C4 gt Git Coane La gt Li lt Vmax 18 lt Imax Note 5 Simple apparatus is def
199. ass Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Intrinsically Safe 140 AII 330 10 CEF ABD 546 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 10 Specifications General Specifications Specifications for the Quantum 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module are as follows Number of Channels 8 IN Current Input Linear Measuring Range 4 20 MA 0 20 0 25 mA Absolute Maximum Input 25 mA internally limited Input Impedance 100 ohms 0 1 between V and signal terminals Resolution 4 20 mA 0 to 4 095 counts 4 20 mAO to 16 000 counts 0 20 mA 0 to 20 000 counts 0 25 mA 0 to 25 000 counts Available Voltage Terminals V V 14 5 Vdc at 25 mA Terminals V Signal 13 6 Vdc at 20 mA Accuracy Error 25 C Typical 0 05 of full scale Maximum 0 1 of full scale Linearity 0 003 of full scale Accuracy Drift w Temperature Typical 0 0025 of full scale Maximum 0 005 of full scale Common Mode Rejection gt 100 dB 50 60 Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3 dB cutoff 15 Hz 20 Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 Vac 47 63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min Update Time 750 ms for all channels Fault Detection Broken wire 4 20 mA mode Bus Current Required 1 5A Power Dissipation 7 5W External Power No
200. at 112 35010516 05 2010 140 AVI 030 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires nine contiguous 16 bit words eight for input data and one for channel status The data words formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 8 Channel 8 data The following shows the word 9 register Word 9 Input status word __ 1 Channel 8 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 7 out of range or broken wire __ 1 Channel 6 out of range or broken wire __ 1 Channel 5 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 4 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 3 out of range or broken wire __ 1 Channel 2 out of range or broken wire __ 1 Channel 1 out of range or broken wire 112 13 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Range warning on channel 8 1 Range warning on channel 7 1 Range warning on channel 6 1 Range warning on channel 5 1 Range warning on channel 4 1 Range warning on channel 3 1 Range warning on channel 2 1 Range warning on channel 1 A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value Warning bit stay on after out of range bits are set An out of range bit is set when a channel inpu
201. ation Protection Isolation Protection Output to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection internal Thermal overload and short circuit Response Resistive Loads Response Resistive Loads OFF ON lt ims ON OFF lt ims 35010516 05 2010 363 140 DDO 364 00 Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance max 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or 0 5 where L Load inductance henry L pm 17 Load current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance max 50 uF Fuses Fuses Internal External User installed per local and national electrical codes 364 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 364 00 140 DDO 364 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window Parameter and Default Values DC Output 24V DC 6x16 source 7 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING Discrete M OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 i gt OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 96 TASK MAST M BINARY Y TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED Y VALUE 1 0 VALUE 2 0 VALUE 3 0 VALUE 4 0 VALUE 5 0 VALUE 6 0 JJ 1 LocalQj 2 140 DDO Default Value Options Description Mapping Discrete WORD QW 4X Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 96 6 Address Output Type BINARY Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST
202. atus plus all cable parameters V Sense 5 6 V Sense 5 so chins eth hes _CaSCi Ccable La Li Leable Voc Vmax Isc Imax Nd N C i G Source 6 Source 6 V Sense 6 V Sense 6 Note 5 Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will l Source 7 I Source 7 Four neither generate nor store more than 1 2V 0 1A 20uJ or 25 mW V Sense 7 4 V Sense 7 For examples switches Thermocouples LEDs and RTDs etc Oe Note 6 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 NIG G9 vc Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations Source 8 Source 8 Instrumentation Part Intrinsic Safety IOO Note 7 Control room equipment connected to associated V Sense 8 V Sense 8 apparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms Note 8 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets LS Module All 330 00 the requirements of ANSI ISA 82 01 Blue Terminal Strip Note 9 No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval sheet refer to 19 100986 Rev 1 Note 11 For Division 2 installation the apparatus shall be installed in compliance with the enclosure mounting spacing and segregation requirements of the ultimate application including access only by the use of a tool and provision for Div 2 wiring methods Note 10 For Schneider Electric internal use only For control 35010516 05 2010 525
203. ault values Parameter Configuration Window AC IN 230V 16x1 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT l 1X INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 EB p BINARY M TASK MAST 11 2 140 DAIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 16 1 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 293 140 DAI 740 00 294 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 753 00 230 VAC 4x8 IN Module 29 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 753 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 296 Indicators 297 Wiring Diagram 298 Specifications 299 Parameter Configuration 301 35010516 05 2010 295 140 DAI 753 00 Presentation Function The AC Input 230 VAC 4x8 module accepts 230 VAC inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 753 00 module and its components
204. ax Isc lt Imax Note 6 Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1 2V 0 1A 20uJ or 25 mW For examples switches Thermocouples LEDs and RTDs etc Note 7 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSIASA RP 12 6 Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations Instrumentation Part Intrinsic Safety Note 8 Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms Note 9 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSIASA S82 01 Note 10 No revision to this drawing without prior FMIRC approval Note 11 For Schneider Electric inlernal use only For control sheet refer to 19 100986 Rev 1 Note 12 For Division 2 installation the apparatus shall be installed in LS Module All 330 10 Blue Terminal Strip 31001363 Rev 01 compliance with the enclosure mounting spacing and HN J segregation requirements of the ultimate application including 140 All 330 10 Wiring Diagram access only by the use of a tool and provision for Division 2 wiring methods 544 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 10 UL Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to UL certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Vec 24 3 V 112 mA C 127 nf La 1 5 mH Note 2 M
205. aximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable Capacitance 60Pf ft Inductance 0 20 Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSIASA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from 1 5 cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to I S terminals must satisfy the following conditions Vec v max lsc lt I max Ca gt Ci La gt Li Leable 31001363 Rev 00 NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION Signal 2 N C V3 Signal 3 HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS I DIVISION I GROUP A B C D Eres SEE NOTE 1 LS 3 wire moe SEE NOTE 1 V4 Signal 4 N C V5 Signal 5 Signal 6 N C V7 N C Signal 7 Signal 8 N C N C N C 1 5 Module All 330 10 Blue Terminal Strip LS 2 wire transmitter Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Note 2 A dropping resistor of 100 Ohms
206. be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules 140 CPU xxx xx 140 CPS xx 31001365 Rev 01 140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram 35010516 05 2010 579 140 DII 330 00 Fixed Wiring System The Quantum 140 DII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Input module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin fixed position blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12 Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment The module s 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module The keying assignment is given below Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Intrinsically Safe 140 DII 330 00 CDE ABF 580 35010516 05 2010 140 DII 330 00 Specifications General Specifications Specifications for the Quantum140 DII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Input module are as follows Number of
207. channel 9 1 7 Input value on channel 10 1 Input value on channel 11 1 Input value on channel 12 1 Input value on channel 13 1 Input value on channel 14 1 Input value on channel 15 1 Input value on channel 16 35010516 05 2010 609 140 SDI 953 00S The following diagram shows the register of word 2 Bit 15 is set to 1 if no leakage current is detected on the sensor of channel 1 bit 14 for channel 2 and so on Word 2 __ 1 wiring problem detected on channel 1 1 wiring problem detected on channel 2 1 wiring problem detected on channel 3 __ 1 wiring problem detected on channel 4 1 wiring problem detected on channel 5 __ 1 zwiring problem detected on channel 6 1 wiring problem detected on channel 7 1 wiring problem detected on channel 8 15 14 13 12 1 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1110 1 wiring problem detected on channel 9 1 7 wiring problem detected on channel 10 1 wiring problem detected on channel 11 1 wiring problem detected on channel 12 1 7 wiring problem detected on channel 13 1 wiring problem detected on channel 14 1 7 wiring problem detected on channel 15 1 wiring problem detected on channel 16 The following diagram shows the register of word 3 If bit 15 is set to 1 it means that c
208. crete I O Logic Circuits llle 315 35010516 05 2010 9 Chapter 32 140 DDO 153 10 5 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module 317 Presentation eee un eM Pe Ew Ree b naci E eb s 318 Indicators ae iu Aes Eduensi ERE E b E 319 Wiring Diagram 2e Sed ba hed ae Gears eb 320 Specifications 4 23 Sed shee ICE BE Re 321 Maintenance cionis etu p E a RUE ape ote Ree 323 140 DDO 153 10 Parameter 325 Chapter 33 140 DDO 353 00 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module 327 Presentations ub RIS eR Se eet REY ru ert qwe 328 lanlum oe 329 Wiring Diagram 2 Me peer Dae Dae 330 Specifications ee as Racks RERUMS 331 Maintenance Ree ehm eed e eon 333 140 DDO 353 00 Parameter 335 Chapter 34 140 DDO 353 01 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module 337 Presentation eq i tied te Rx Bad oh ata E 338 INGICALONS Sf m 339 Wiring Diagram IRI 340 Specifications usns ier mega eee bree do chet 342 Maintenance us esee dene REA pea REOR e 344 140 DDO 353 01 Parameter 345 Chapter 35 140 DDO 353 10 24 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module 347 Presentation ciment be ee eRe geb see 348 INGICALONS 5 diag ie ee eire et ene dei de et 349 Wiring Diagfam e cR ob NC RO 350 Specifications reu Dex rv
209. ction None Group supply Tolerance Group supply Tolerance Group supply Tolerance ON State OFF State 12 VDC 5 9 12 VDC 0 1 8 VDC IEC 57 Class2 24 VDC 15 20 11 24 VDC 0 5 VDC IEC 65A Type 2 48 VDC 15 20 34 48 VDC 0 10 VDC IEC 65A Type 1 60 VDC 15 20 45 60 VDC 0 12 5 VDC IEC 57 Class1 OFF state ranges are specified at nominal reference voltages Isolation Isolation Group to Group 700 VDC for 1 minute Group to Bus 2500 VDC for 1 minute Input Rating Input Rating Absolute Maximum Input 75 VDC Input Protection Resistor Limited 35010516 05 2010 227 140 DDI 853 00 ON State Current ON State Current Q 12 VDC 5 10 mA Q 24 VDC 6 30 mA 48 VDC 2 15mA 60 VDC 1 5 Response Switching Frequency Response Switching Frequency OFF ON 4 ms ON OFF 4 ms Switching Frequency 100 Hz max Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes 228 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 853 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window DC IN 10 60V 4x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING 25 1 X Y INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUIS ENDING ADDRESS 32 NPUT TYPE BINAR
210. d Default Values 1 5 digital output M Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING M OX vi OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 8 TASK MAST M BINARY Y TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED VALUE 0 Mut Local Qy 2 140DIO Name Default Value Options Description Mapping 96M 0x WORD MW 4X Output Starting 1 1 Address Output Ending 8 1 Address Output Type BINARY Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 255 only enabled if Timeout State USERDEFINED 572 35010516 05 2010 140 DII 330 00 Safe Discrete IN Module 55 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DII 330 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 574 Indicators 575 Wiring Diagrams 576 Specifications 581 Parameter Configuration 582 35010516 05 2010 573 140 DII 330 00 Presentation Function The Quantum 140 DII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Input module provides safe power to dry contact closures e g push buttons selector switches float switches flow switches limit switches etc in a hazardous area and receives the proportional current to indicate an on off state The received current is converted into
211. d Last Value Value 1 Value 2 0 0 65535 only if Timeout State USERDEFINED 35010516 05 2010 325 140 DDO 153 10 326 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 00 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module 33 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 353 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 328 Indicators 329 Wiring Diagram 330 Specifications 331 Maintenance 333 140 DDO 353 00 Parameter Configuration 335 35010516 05 2010 327 140 DDO 353 00 Presentation Function The DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Source module switches 24 VDC powered loads and is for use with shared ouput common wired to 0 V Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 00 module and its components 2 6 2 o AS IR Omn p NEU o N 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 328
212. d by Unity Pro e Maximum consecutive CRC errors before declaring the module unhealthy e Timeout before modules goes to fallback state e Fallback state user defined or hold last value NOTE The module only uses the word interface QW 4x Although the module is a digital output it cannot be configured to use the bit interface Q 0x During normal operation the 140 SDO 953 00S module cyclically tests its internal process side electronics so that the module detects the status of the output channels It also runs a set of diagnostic tests on its internal system and on its internal process side electronics Output Fallback State Configuration In case the 140 SDO 953 00S module detects a discrepancy in the data from the host the module sets its outputs to configured fall back state The outputs of the 140 SDO 953 00S module have three states e energized e de energized e maintain last state fall back state In the parameter configuration screen of the Unity Pro you can configure the output position in case the module is no more serviced by the processor module You can either maintain last value or define another value 626 35010516 05 2010 140 SDO 953 00S Parameter and Default Values Parameter Configuration Window SAFETY DC OUT 10 30V 16x1 B Overview Config YO Objects Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD MhW 3X eMW
213. d fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 35010516 05 2010 385 140 DDO 885 00 Illustration The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DDO 885 00 module n Fuse Locations i Points 7 12 386 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 885 00 140 DDO 885 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window 125VDC OUT 2x6 m Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT ol 1X M OX 7 gt INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 gt INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 TASK MAST X INPUT TYPE BINARY Y E BINARY v TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED M _ VALUE 0 T1 Local Qj 2 140 DDO Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping 1 1 0 WORD IW 3X MW 4X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 16 1 Address Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 16 1 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 387 140 DDO 885 00 Name Default Value Options Description Input Type BIN
214. d to UL certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 Group A B C D SEE NOTE 1 channel V4 27 9 V Ig 119 mA C4 84 nf L4 1 0 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable Capacitance 60 Pf ft Inductance 0 20 uH ft Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminal as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to I S terminals must satisfy the following conditions V lc s Imax Ca gt Ci La A Li ec S Vmax Input 1 PERO LO MEN Chassis Ground LS Module DII 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip LS Field Device Note 1 Only shielded cables should be usec for connections Shields should be left open at the fiek and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electroni cally connected to the module Note 3 Only Quantum 140 XBP oX oo back planes should
215. ddressing 800 Series I O Modules Introduction Examples 800 series I O modules follow a system of flat address mapping in Unity Pro To work properly each module requires a determinate number of bits and or words The IEC addressing system is equivalent to the 984LL register addressing Use the following assignments e Ox is now 3Mx e 1xis now Ix e 3x is now e 4x is now MWx The following table shows the relationship between 984LL notation and IEC notation Outputs and 984LL Notation IEC Notation Inputs Register System Bits Memory Addresses Addresses and Words Addresses output Ox System Bit QX input 1x System Bit 3x System Word 96IWx 96IWx output 4x System Word MWx 9eQWx To access the I O data of a module Step Action 1 Enter the address range in the configuration screen The following examples show the relationship between 984LL register addressing and IEC addressing 000001 is now M1 100101 is now 1101 301024 is now 1W1024 400010 is now MW10 26 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Topological Addressing 800 Series I O Modules with Unity Accessing I O Data Values Use topological addressing to access I O data items Identify the topological location of the module within an 800 series I O module with Unity Pro using the following notation lt Exchangetype gt lt Objecttype gt b e r m c rank
216. e What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 130 Indicators 131 Wiring Diagram 132 Specifications 134 Addressing 136 Parameter Configuration 137 35010516 05 2010 129 140 ACO 130 00 Presentation Function The 140 ACO 130 00 is an 8 channel analog output module used to control and monitor current in 4 20 mA 0 20 mA and 0 25 mA loops Illustration The following figure shows the 140 ACO 130 00 module and its components D aco 130 00 2 Gm Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label oa hWnd 130 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 130 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ACO 130 00 module 4 cd 2 r2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 T 8 8 Description The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ACO 130 00 module LEDs C
217. e J Gain 25 K Gain 25 E Gain 25 T Gain 100 S Gain 100 R Gain 100 Channel2 Channel8 see Channel1 104 35010516 05 2010 140 AVI 030 00 Analog Mixed Current Voltage IN Module About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AVI 030 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 106 Indicators 107 Wiring Diagram 108 Specifications 110 Addressing 113 Parameter Configuration 115 35010516 05 2010 105 140 AVI 030 00 Presentation Function The Analog In 8 Channel Bipolar module accepts a mix of current and voltage inputs Jumpers are required between the input and sense terminals for current inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 AVI 030 00 module and its components O 6 27 l Omna NU Y o 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal str
218. e onse 240 the ground screws on the Capacitance60 Pf ft backplane Inductance0 20 uH ft N C Source 4 Note 2 Thermocouple tip may Note 4 Install in accordance be grounded if required with the NEC ANSINFPA 70 V Sense 4 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for Is 5 installation in the United States Source 5 Sense 5 Sense 5 See Note 1 mV Source O Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminal Source 6 as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module Chassis Ground Note 3 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically Note 7 S devices when connected to the module connected to I S terminals mus satisfy the following conditions Note 4 Only Quantum Voc V max 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting 1 2 lt 1 gt b this module along with the Ls sb abeo I S Module All 330 00 following UL listed modules gt Li 140 CPU xxx xx 140 CPS xxx xx Blue Terminal Strip 35010516 05 2010 527 140 AII 330 00 Field Wiring Field wiring to the module shall consist of separate shielded twisted pair wires The acceptable field wire gauge shall be AWG 20 to AWG 12 In a 2 wire field configuration the maximum
219. e AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 FILTER_SELECTION Input Type BINARY BCD Group A 0 7 ms 1 5 ms Group B Group C see Group A 214 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 841 00 10 60 VDC 8x2 Sink IN Module 1 9 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 841 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 216 Indicators 217 Wiring Diagram 218 Specifications 219 Parameter Configuration 221 35010516 05 2010 215 140 DDI 841 00 Presentation Function The DC Input 10 60 VDC 8x2 Sink module accepts 10 60 VDC inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential ON OFF levels are dependent on the reference voltage selected Different reference voltages may be used for different groups Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 841 00 module and its components 0 00124100 1 Gm Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring t
220. e controller in the I O Map status byte Voltage Voltage Loop Voltage 6 30 VDC max Internal Voltage Drop 6 VDC min 30 VDC max 25 mA Range Resolution Range Resolution 0 25 mA 25 000 counts 0 20 mA 20 000 counts 4 20 mA 0 16 000 counts 4 25 mA 4 095 counts Accuracy Accuracy Accuracy Error 25 degrees C 0 20 of full scale Accuracy Drift with Temperature Typical 0 004 of full scale degrees C Maximum 0 007 of full scale degrees C 134 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 130 00 Linearity Linearity 0 25 mA 4 uA 0 20 mA 4 20 MA 4 25 mA 12 uA Times Times Update Time 5 ms for all Channels Settling Time Full Scale 1 6 ms to 5 of the final value Step Change 3 2 ms to 5 of the final value Isolation Isolation Field to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute Channel to Channel None Fuses Fuses Internal None External None 35010516 05 2010 135 140 ACO 130 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires eight contiguous 16 bit words MW for output data The data words formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 8 Channel 8 data Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 1
221. e deg 609 Parameter 612 Chapter 60 140 SDO 953 00S Digital OUT Module 613 Presentation o awe d reu arte a ee 614 laser PIC 615 Wiring Diagram ceret ERE u ER e rae 616 Specifications gv Bre Due euch ee tees 618 Addressing cesis Bias bed Ae RE ATO Reds Sa 620 Parameter 626 Index asi wine ce T aov iw bes ew reme d od ed 629 14 35010516 05 2010 Safety Information ZZ Important Information NOTICE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure injury if the instructions are not followed This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal A symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious in
222. e following figure shows the 140 SDO 953 00S module and its components L 1 140 XTS 002 wiring terminal block Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Field Wiring Terminal Block not provided with the module Removable Door not provided with the module Red Customer Identification Label Fold label provided with the module and place it inside the door arownd NOTE The housing of safety modules is red and a red customer identification label is provided with Quantum Safety I O modules It shall be placed on the terminal block 614 35010516 05 2010 140 SDO 953 00S Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 SDO 953 00S module R Active F 1 9 1 9 2 10 2 10 M 4 12 4 12 5 13 5 13 6 14 6 14 7 15 T 15 8 16 8 16 Description The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 SDO 953 00S module Type of LED Id Color State Meaning LED System R Green ON Power ON Power OFF Active Green ON The module is communicating with the host OFF The module is not communicating with the host F Red ON An internal diagnostic error is detected and or the module is in fallback state OFF No internal diagnostic error is detected and the module is not in fallback state Channel 1 16 Green ON The channel is ON LED OFF The channe
223. e information and checking each other periodically You can install these I O modules in the local backplane or in remote I O drops Description of the Communication In general the Quantum Safety CPU masters all backplane exchanges whereas the other modules are slaves Between Safety CPU and Safety I Os data are exchanged through a dual port RAM located in the I O module For the communication between CPU and remote I Os RIOs you must use the following 2 non interfering modules e 140 CRP 932 00 RIO head adapter located in the local rack e 140 CRA 932 00 RIO drop adapter located in the RIO drop The communication protocol between the Safety I O and CPU secures their exchanges It allows both to check the correctness of received data and detect any failure of the transmitter or during the transmission Thus a safety loop may include any non interfering RIO adapters and backplane For details on this topic see Safety I O Modules Diagnostics see page 587 The Safety I O modules provide features for line monitoring see Safety I O Modules Diagnostics see page 587 and the Quantum with Unity Pro Discrete and Analog I O Reference Manual NOTE Use the red labels provided with the Quantum Safety IO modules to clearly indicate the Safety modules 586 35010516 05 2010 General Information Safety I O Modules Diagnostics Description of the I O Diagnostics The following table lists the field diagnostics of
224. e the pushbutton to select output points to be displayed as per the following table LED 32 64 Out 1 to 32 Off Off Out 33 to 64 On Off Out 65 to 96 Off On 35010516 05 2010 361 140 DDO 364 00 140 DDO 364 00 Cable Color Codes Cable Color Codes for all Groups 1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Gray 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red 9 Black 10 Purple 11 Gray pink 12 Red blue 13 White green 14 Brown green 15 White yellow 16 Yellow brown 17 White gray 18 Gray brown 19 White pink 20 Pink brown 362 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 364 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 96 OUT 6 groups x 16 points External Power 19 2 30 VDC 19 2 A max determined by load Power Dissipation 7 0W Bus Current required Module 250 mA max map 6 output word Fault Detection Group indication about loss of field power short circuit or overload Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 19 2 30 VDC ON State Drop Point 0 5 VDC 0 5A Maximum Load Current Surge Current Maximum Load Current Surge Current Each Point Each Group 3 2A Per Module 19 2A Surge Current max 2 A each point internally limited OFF State Leakage Point 1mA 24 VDC Isol
225. ectrically connected within the module These points are used as a thermal link to ambient air They are not recommended as electrical tie points as this could affect the accuracy of cold junction compensation The 140 CFA 040 00 CableFast block can be used However it can create a temperature variation up to 35 6 F 2 C For more information refer to the Modicon Quantum Automation Series Hardware Reference Guide 840 USE 100 NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 95 140 ATI 030 00 Using Cold Junction Compensation CJC For temperature measurements the 140 ATI 030 00 provides an internal CJC However a remote CJC can be used with the following TC types J K and T The TC must be connected to Channel 1 NOTE Recomendation when using remote CJC e To obtain the best accuracy when using a remote CJC connect it as close as possible from the 140 ATI 030 00 module e The distance between the external CJC and the module affects the temperature measurement accuracy e The usage of CableFast with a remote CJC is not recommended The following diagram shows how to connect a remote Cold Junction Compensation using a temperature compensation on the 140 ATI 030 00 Not Used For more information on the 140 ATI 030 00 please refer to the Modicon Quantum Automation Series Hardware Reference Guide 8
226. ed input value by 2 4 or when a broken wire 4 20 mA mode is sensed on the channel 35010516 05 2010 163 140 AMM 090 00 The following shows the output words 1 and 2 Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 2 Ch annel 2 data Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 AMM 090 00 Input Output Module Point 1 0 Object Comment Input 1 IWDb e r m 1 Value 9el Vo eVr m 1 1 Out of range 9el Vo eV r m 1 2 Range warning Input 4 9elW Wo eVr m 4 Value l b e r m 4 1 Out of range l b e r m 4 2 Range warning Status Word IW b e r m 5 Status of in out channels Output 1 9eQW w eVr m 1 Value 9el Vo eV r m 1 3 Broken wire Output 2 QW b e r m 2 Value l b e r m 2 3 Broken wire Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot 164 35010516 05 2010 140 AMM 090 00 IODDT The 140 AMM 090 00 Input Output Module uses the T VWEIODDT for the first 2 input and output channels and the T ANA IN VWE for the input channels and 4 IODDT Name Object Data Type Name T ANA BI VWE CH b e r m c ANA IN VWE userdefined 9elWr m c 0 Int VALUE IN elQr m c 0 Int MALUE OUT 9elr m c 1 Bool ERROR IN 9elr m c 2 Bool WARNING IN 9elr m c 3 Bool ERROR OUT T ANA IN VWE CHf b e r m c ANA IN VWE userdefined 9e
227. ed per local and national electrical codes 596 35010516 05 2010 140 SAI 940 00S Addressing Overview The following information describes how the data exchanged between the 140 SAI 940 00S module and the processor module are mapped Except for the health word the data described here are transferred from the 140 SAI 940 00S module using the Quantum global backplane communication access mechanism which is common to all Quantum modules NOTE 13 words are necessary for this module e 8 words dedicated to channel values e 1 word dedicated to errors and warnings e 3 words used by the module module status exchange number CRC e 1 health word this word is accessible by the processor module only Flat Addressing The following diagram shows the register of words 1 to 8 On word 1 you read the analog value sampled by channel 1 and so on Word 1 Channel 1 data gt Word 8 Channel 8 data 35010516 05 2010 597 140 SAI 940 00S The following diagram shows the register of word 9 If bit 15 is setto 1 it means that channel 1 is out of range If bit 7 is set to 1 it means that channel 1 is invalid See the following diagram for the other channels Word 9 1 Channel 1 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 2 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel out of range or broken wi
228. ee Note 1 d VOLTAGE 5 3 5 Notes on Wiring Diagram LOAD SOURCE OUTPUT X N O RELAY X COMMON contact life 1N 4004 or equivalent e N C Not Connected e N O Normally Open e N C Normally Closed One of 16 Typical e For 125 VDC inductive loads external clamping is recommended to extend relay NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 444 35010516 05 2010 140 DRA 840 00 Specifications General Specifications Operating Voltage General Specifications Module Type 16 OUT normaly open External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 5 5 W 0 5 W x input points ON Bus Current required Module 1100 mA map 1 output word Operating Voltage AC 20 250 VAC DC 5 30 VDC 30 150 VDC reduced load Current Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point 2 Amps per point maximum at 250 VAC 30 VDC at 60 deg C ambient 1 A Tungsten lamp load 1 A a power factor of 0 4 1 8 hp 125 250 VAC Each Point 30 150 VDC 300 mA restive load 100 mA L R 10 msec Surge Current max 10 Acapac
229. eferences or as 1 SMW output word in the following format For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB 35010516 05 2010 51 Addressing Modes Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 16 8 Point Input Output Modules Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Input 1 9el No eV r m 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 Value Input 15 l b e r m 15 Value Input 16 l b e r m 16 Value Output 1 Q b e r m 1 Value Output 2 Q b e r m 2 Value Output 7 Q b e r m 7 Value Output 8 Q b e r m 8 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Inputword 1 IW b e r m 1 1 Value Outputword 1 9eQW Wb eVr m 1 1 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot I O Map Status Byte Outputs The two least significant bits in the output I O map status byte are used as follows 1 L Group B Error L Group A Error 35010516 05 2010 General Rules for Attaching Discrete and Analog Input Output 3 Modules Terminal Blocks Attaching a Discrete and Analog Modules Terminal Blocks At a glance Attaching a terminal block to a discrete analog module is decribed below
230. el to Channel 30 VDC max Current Input Absolute Voltage max 50 VDC Linear Mesuring Range 1 5 VDC Input Impedance 20 Mohms Current Input Absolute Current max 25 mA Linear Measuring Range 4 20 mA Input Impedance 250 ohms 0 01 35010516 05 2010 63 140 ACI 030 00 Resolution Conversion Resolution Conversion Resolution 12 bit Absolute Accuracy Error 25 degrees C Typical 0 05 of full scale voltage mode Maximum 0 1 of full scale Linearity 0 04 Accuracy drift with temperature Typical 0 0025 of full scale degrees C Maximum 0 005 of full scale degrees C Common Mode Rejection 72 dB 60 Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3 dB cutoff 15 Hz 2096 Update Time 5 ms for all channels Isolation Isolation Channel to Bus 1000 VDC 3000 Vpp for 1 minute NOTE Calibration is not required for this module 64 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 030 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires nine contiguous 16 bit words eight for input data and one for channel status The data words formats are as follows Word 1 Word 8 L3 1E JP 3 The following shows the word 9 register 1 6 7 8 1 Broken wire
231. elevant instructions must be followed Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in injury harm or improper operating results Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage 2010 Schneider Electric All rights reserved 35010516 05 2010 Document Set Presentation This package contains the following manuals e Quantum Hardware Reference Manual Quantum Discrete and Analog I O Reference Manual Quantum Experts and Communication Reference Manual Grounding and Electromagnetic Compatibility of PLC Systems User Manual e e e e Quantum Series 800 I O Reference Manual 35010516 05 2010 35010516 05 2010 Table of Contents Part 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Part Il Chapter 4 Safety Information About the General Module Configuration Mapping Local Quantum I O Station Open the Parameter Quantum Addressing Modes Flat Addressing 800 Series I O Modules Topological Addressing 800 Series I O Modules with Unity IODDT Addressing QuantuMiODDTS Ica hee eee A AMI REG RS Addres
232. er 20 56 VAC Power Dissipation 1 85 W 1 1 V x Total module load Currents Bus Current required Module 350 mA map 1 output words Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of field power Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input 10s 63 VAC 1 Cycle 100 VAC 1 3 ms 111 VAC peak Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 20 56 VAC ON State Drop Point 1 5 VAC Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point 4 0 A continuous 20 56 VAC rms Each Group 4 0 A continuous Per Module 16 A continuous see the chart below 426 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 20 The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 20 Operating Curve DAO 842 20 Operating Curve 17 16 x 15 14 SS 13 B tz amp 10 N 9 N 20 56 V rms a 7 9 2 5 amp 4 e 3 2 1 A 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C Frequency and Minimum Load Current Frequency 47 63 Hz Minimum Load Current 5 mA Surge Current max rms Leakage Surge Current max rms Leakage One Cycle 30 A per point 45 A per group Two Cycles 20 A per point 30 A per group Three Cycles 10 A per point 25 A per group Applied dV dT 400 V us OFF State Leakage Point 1 mA max 3
233. erminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label ouhWhnhd 216 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 841 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 841 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fa 8 Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Oak WON The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 841 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 217 140 DDI 841 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 841 00 wiring diagram o o INPUT 2 GROUP A SUPPLY INPUT 4 GROUP B SUPPLY N C INPUT 6 GROUP C SUPPLY INPUT 8 GROUP D SUPPLY N C INPUT 10 GROUP E SUPPLY INPUT 12 GROUP F SUPPLY N C INPUT 14 GROUP G SUPPLY INPUT 16 GROUP H SUPPLY N C amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp amp 9 amp amp amp e 9 9 O NOTE N Not Connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG
234. ers should be provided power only from the module An external power supply should not be used Signal 8 Note 4 Pins marked Not NE Ne Connected are not electronically 1 5 Module All 330 10 connected to the module Blue Terminal Strip 31001363 Rev 00 140 All 330 10 Wiring Diagram 542 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 10 CSA Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to CSA certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Voc 23 8 V lg 112 mA C 127nf L7 10 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part for installation in Canada Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrin sic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possi ble Note 6 intrinsically Safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from 1 5 cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 termi nals must satisfy the fol lowing conditions Voc s V max lsc lt Imax Ca gt Ci Capi La gt Li Leable Note 8 This module is cer tified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suit ability of the final combina ti
235. ete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB First Word Input Panti 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 MSB Second Word Input 47 48 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Point 17 MSB Third Word Input 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Point 33 MSB Fourth Word Input 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Point 49 MSB Fifth Word Input 565 66 67 69 71 72 73 74 75 T6 77 78 79 80 Point 65 MSB Sixth Word Input 82 83 84 85 86 87 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 Point 81 40 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 96 Point Input Modules Map Status Byte There is no I O map status byte associated with this module Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point Object Comment Input 1 9el Vo eV r m 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 Value Input 95 l b e r m 95 Value Input 96 lf b e r m 96 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point VO Object Comment Inputword 1 IW b e r m 1 1 Value Inputword 2 IW b e r m 1 2 Value Inputword 3 IW b e r m 1 3 Value Inputword 4 IW b e r m 1 4 Value Inputword 5 IW b e r m 1 5 Value Inputword 6 IW b e r m 1 6 Value Used abbreviations
236. example in the illustration above 606 35010516 05 2010 140 SDI 953 00S Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 IN 1 group x 16 points Logic True High External Power 24 VDC 19 2 30 VDC Power Dissipation 2 75 W 0 25 W x the number of ON points Bus Current Required 550 mA map 7 input words Fault Detection broken wire below 1mA e internal invalid channel diagnostic system inoperative Update Time 15 ms for all channels Isolation Isolation Group to Group N A Group to Bus 1 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Input Rating Input Rating ON Level voltage 11 30 VDC OFF Level voltage 3 5 VDC ON Level current 3 0 mA min OFF Level current 1 5 mA max Internal input impedance 3 675 kohms Input Protection By internal rectifier Absolute Maximum Inputs Absolute Maximum Inputs Continuous 30 VDC 35010516 05 2010 607 140 SDI 953 00S Response Fuses Response OFF ON 25 ms max ON OFF 25 ms max Fuses Internal None External 1 fast blow fuse mandatory CAUTION OVERCURRENT TO THE INPUTS Use fast acting fuses to protect the electronic components of the module from overcurrent Improper fuse selection could result to damage to the module Failure to foll
237. f 34 Hz 25 Update Time 15 ms for all channels Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes 35010516 05 2010 75 140 ACI 040 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires 17 contiguous 16 bit words 16 for input data and one for channel status The data words formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 16 Channel 16 data The following shows the word 17 Word 17 Input status word __ 1 Broken wire on channel 16 1 Broken wire on channel 15 __ 1 Broken wire on channel 14 __ 17 Broken wire on channel 13 1 Broken wire on channel 12 __ 1 Broken wire on channel 11 __ 1 Broken wire on channel 10 __ 1 Broken wire on channel 9 1 213 4 5 61789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Broken wire on channel 8 1 Broken wire on channel 7 1 Broken wire on channel 6 1 Broken wire on channel 5 1 Broken wire on channel 4 1 Broken wire on channel 3 1 Broken wire on channel 2 1 Broken wire on channel 1 76 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 040 00 Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 ACI 040 00 Input Module
238. f an unhealthy input is detected if a bit on word 7 is set to 0 the value of the corresponding channel is set to O on word 1 The following diagram shows the register of word 7 Word 7 1 Channel 1 OK 1 Channel 2 OK 1 Channel3 OK __ 1 Channel 4 OK 1 Channel 5 OK __ 1 Channel 6 OK __ 1 Channel 7 OK 1 Channel 8 OK 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 413 12 1 0 1 Channel 9 1 Channel 10 OK 1 Channel 11 OK 1 Channel 12 OK 1 Channel 13 OK 1 Channel 14 OK 1 Channel 15 1 Channel 16 OK Bit 15 to bit 0 These 16 bits are set to 1 when no error is detected 35010516 05 2010 611 140 SDI 953 00S Parameter Confi Modes of Operation guration The 140 SDI 953 008 module is configurable The configuration includes e Drop and Slot number automatically filled by Unity Pro e Maximum consecutive CRC errors before declaring the module unhealthy If an unhealthy input is detected i e a bit on word 7 is set to 0 the value of the corresponding channel is set to 0 on word 1 The module provides process side diagnostics helping the customer to debug the process interface during setup process power supply detection and open circuit detection Parameter and Default Values Parameter Configuration Window
239. field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module The keying assignment is given below Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Intrinsically Safe 140 DIO 330 00 CDE ABF 570 35010516 05 2010 140 DIO 330 00 Specification Specifications Table Specifications for the Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Output module are as follows Number of Output Points 8 OUT Output Voltage 24 V open Maximum Load Current Each Point 45 mA Per Module 360 mA Off State Leakage Point 0 4 mA Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1ms ON OFF 1ms Output Protection Internal Transient voltage suppression Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 VAC 47 63 Hz or 2500 VDC for 1 min Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 2 2 Amp full load Power Dissipation 5 W full load External Power Not required Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety requirements Fusing Internal not user accessible 35010516 05 2010 571 140 DIO 330 00 140 DIO 330 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window Parameter an
240. following conditions SEE NOTE 1 Voc Vmax om cn 1 leo lt Imax 3 Wire RTD Resistor Ca gt Ci Sense 8 Connection La gt Li Leable LS Module All 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip Note 2 Pins marked Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 3 Only Quantum Chassis 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should Ground be used for mounting this module along 1 with the following UL listed modules 140 CPU xxx xx 140 CPS xxx xx 526 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection Notes related to NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION UL certification CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 for this module GROUP A D Note 1 Entity parameters SEE NOTE 1 channel Vj 2155 V 1 123 mA 5 047 uf Source 1 4 C Source 1 La 2466 mH V Sense 1 Thermocouple Type J K E LR SB Note 2 Maximum non N C See Note 2 hazardous area voltage must Source 2 not exceed 250 V A Chassis Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair Note 3 If the electrical V Sense 2 Ground cables should be used for parameters of the cable are unknown the following values Source 3 must be used for Ccable and connections Shields should be left open at the field end and k YS 3 D connected to chassis ground at Lcabl
241. for connection with IS Analog Current IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below The entity parameters are per channel Voc 23 8 VDC Isc 112 mA Ch Ca 127 nf CH La 2 9 mH Ch Po 622 mW CH HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION Class 1 Div 2 Group A B C D Class Div Group A B C D Class II Div Group E F G Class Ill Div a Oke ie N C Signal 1 v2 v2 Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections 9 ole Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end Chassis Note 2 Pins marked are not electronically connected to Ground the Module Note 3 Only 140 XBP Oxx 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module Note 4 Three wire transmitters should be provided power only from the Module External Power Supply should not be used Signal 2 N C Note 5 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically safe apparatus plus all cable parameters N C Ca gt Ccable La gt Li Leable Voc lt Vm
242. for current inputs jumper installed between IN and SENSE terminals a broken field wire results in a zero current reading If 4 20 mA is selected error LEDs and warning out of range are displayed Resolution Conversion Resolution Conversion 16 bit 10 VDC 0 10 VDC 15 bit 5 VDC 0 5 VDC 20 mA 0 20 mA 14 bit 1 5 VDC 4 20 mA Absolute Accuracy Error 25 degrees Voltage mode C Typical 0 03 of full scale e Maximum 0 05 of full scale Current mode e Add an extra 0 03 to voltage specification Linearity Monotonic 1 LSB Offset 0 60 degrees C 0 0014 of full scale max Gain Shift 0 60 degrees C 0 002 of full scale max Common Mode Rejection Better than 80 dB 50 or 60 Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3 dB 21 Hz 20 Update Time 320 ms for 4 channels Isolation Isolation Channel to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute 750 VDC rms for 1 minute Channel to Channel 500 VAC rms for 1 minute 750 VDC rms for 1 minute 160 35010516 05 2010 140 AMM 090 00 Fuses Fuses Internal Not required External User installed per local and national electrical codes Output Specifications Output Specifications Loop Voltage 30 VDC up to 60 VDC with an external resistor Loop Resistance Haw 7 V oop 30 VDC 0 020A Rmax V 7 V
243. for the 140 DAI 540 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 265 140 DAI 540 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 540 00 wiring diagram RETURN 1 INPUT 1 L HN e E RETURN 2 INPUT 2 RETURN 3 INPUT 3 RETURN 4 INPUT 4 eG RETURN 5 amp INPUT 5 RETURN 6 D INPUT 6 RETURN 7 INPUT 7 RETURN 8 Kp INPUT8 i RETURN 9 INPUT 9 RETURN 10 em 53 INPUT 10 RETURN 11 INPUT 11 RETURN 12 INPUT 12 NIC NIC RETURN 13 T T INPUT 13 RETURN 14 INPUT 14 RETURN 15 D INPUT 15 RETURN 16 INPUT 16 NIC NIC Not Connected 2 This module is not polarity sensitive 3 When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Ensure that all inputs in a group are from the same phase of line input voltage Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 266 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 540 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specificat
244. formation on the Quantum 140 DDO 364 00 Module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 358 Indicators 361 140 DDO 364 00 Cable Color Codes 362 Specifications 363 140 DDO 364 00 Parameter Configuration 365 35010516 05 2010 357 140 DDO 364 00 Presentation Function The 140 DDO 364 00 module switches 24 VDC powered loads Outputs are thermally protected 358 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 364 00 Illustration The front view of the 140 DDO 364 00 output module DDO 364 00 24 VDC OUT 432 464 F ae 1 9 17 25 2 10 18 26 3 11 19 27 4 12 20 28 5 13 21 29 6 14 22 30 7 15 23 31 8 16 24 32 D A 049 050 001 002 051 052 003 004 053 054 005 006 055 056 007 008 057 058 009 010 059 060 O11 012 O61 062 013 014 063 064 015 016 24 24 COM 24 COM 24 COM B oes oee 017 pis 67 068 019 020 69 070 021 22 071 072 023 24 073 074 025 p26 075 076 027 028 077 078 029 p30 079 080 031 032 24 COM H24V COM 24V COM H24V COM F C 81 082 033 J034 083 084 035 036 085 086 037 038 087 085 039 040 089 090 041 042 91 097 043 044 093 094 045 1046 095 096 047 048 24 COM 24 COM Input Indicator Pushbut
245. g Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the DDI 673 00 wiring diagram INPUT 2 2 INPUT 1 c e I INPUT 4 4 INPUT 3 a e INPUTS INPUT 5 uia e INPUT 8 INPUT 7 o d e T GROUP A COMMON N C N C iue N C INPUT 10 INPUTS FIELD DEVICE INPUT 12 ZINPUCM GROUP B COMMON N C INPUT 14 INPUT13 INPUT 16 INPUT15 N C NIC N C NIC N C NIC INPUT 18 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 INPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON N C amp amp amp amp 8 amp amp 8 9 G amp 9 9 NOTE N C Not Connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 210 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 673 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 24 IN 3 groups x 8 points Logic True High External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 1 0 W 0 62 W x the number of points ON Bus Current required 200 mA max map 2 input words Error Detection None Isolation Isolation Group to Group 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 2500 VAC rms for 1 minute Input Rating Input Rating ON Level voltage 88
246. ge Voltmeter Monitor Specific ations Range 0 250 1 250 V Scaling Vour Volts mA x 0 0625 Output Impedance 62 5 W Typical Wire Length 1 m maximum Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible 35010516 05 2010 559 140 AIO 330 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires eight contiguous 16 bit words MW for output data The data words formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 8 Channel 8 data Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 1033000 Output Module Point Object Comment Output 1 9eQW w eVr m 1 Value Output 2 9eQW W eVr m 2 Value Output 7 9eQW eVr m 7 Value Output 8 9eQW wb eVr m 8 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 1033000 Output Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 6 5 4 13 2 1 Channel 1 loop broken wire Channel 2 loop broken wire Channel 3 loop broken wiree L Channel 4 loop broken wire Channel 5 loop broken wire Channel 6 loop broken wire Channel 7 loop broken wiree Channel 8 loop broken wire 560 35010516 05 2010 140 AIO 330
247. hannel 1 has detected an invalid channel bit 14 is for channel 2 and so on Word 3 1 Channel 1 invalid 1 Channel 2 invalid 1 Channel 3 invalid 1 Channel 4 invalid m 1 Channel 5 invalid 1 7 Channel 6 invalid 1 Channel 7 invalid 1 Channel 8 invalid 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 413 12 1 0 1 Channel 9 invalid 1 Channel 10 invalid 1 Channel 11 invalid 1 Channel 12 invalid 1 Channel 13 invalid 1 Channel 14 invalid 1 Channel 15 invalid 1 Channel 16 invalid On word 4 bit 15 is dedicated to the Process Power supply status It is set to 1 if the external power supply is no longer detected The other bits on word 4 and words 5 and 6 are used by the module for internal checking e Exchange number serial number of the set of data e Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC function used to detect errors after transmission 610 35010516 05 2010 140 SDI 953 00S Health Word The health word is an extra system control generated by the processor module using the data read from the input module Any of these errors activates the health word broken wire activates only the corresponding bit of the health word invalid channel activates only the corresponding bit of the health word process power supply not detected CRC error incorrect exchange number I
248. hazardous area The Quantum Intrinsically Safe family of modules are entity certified to be installed in safe areas to monitor control intrinsically safe apparatus located In hazardous areas Intrinsically Safe Barriers All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the intrinsically safe barrier between them and the field devices located in hazardous areas Galvanic isolation in the form of an opto isolator and DC DC converter is provided between the field side output circuitry and the Quantum bus circuitry The maximum agency specified intrinsically safe parameters are Voc 28 VDC lso lt 100mA Intrinsically Safe Power Supply DC DC converters in Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules provide intrinsically safe power to field devices located in hazardous areas No external field power is required where these modules are installed Installation of Quantum Intrinsically Safe Modules Hot Swapping Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard 140 XBP OXX 00 Quantum rack The modules can be installed in any slot position in the rack The first slot is normally reserved for the power supply module A WARNING LOSS OF ABILITY TO PERFORM SAFETY FUNCTIONS Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 514 35010516 05 2010 General Information
249. he 140 ACI 030 00 Input Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 L 1 Broken wire under voltage on one or more input channels 66 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 030 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AN IN 8 CH UNIPOLAR Parameter Name Config Value MAPPING WORD IW 3X INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 9 MAST v qmi LocalQj 2 140 ACIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 Address Inputs Ending 9 includes a Address Statusword Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUXS3 35010516 05 2010 67 140 ACI 030 00 68 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 040 00 Analog Mixed Current IN Module About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 ACI 040 00 Module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 70 Indicators 71 Wiring Diagram 72 Specifications 74 Addressing 76 Parameter Configuration 78 35010516 05 2010 69 140 ACI 040 00 Presentation Function The 140 ACI 040 00 is a 16 channel analog input module which accepts mixed curre
250. he module becomes healthy before the input hardware initialization has completed During this time invalid temperature values and status information could be received from the module see input words 1 10 and I O map status byte Absolute accuracy update and configuration time TC Absolute Accuracy see Note 1 Types J K E T see Note 2 2 degrees C plus 0 1 reading Types S R B see Note 3 4 degrees C plus 0 1 reading Millivolt Absolute Accuracy 25 20 microV 0 1 of reading degrees C Accuracy Drift with Temperature 0 15 uV degrees C 0 0015 of reading degrees C max Update Time 1 s all channels Configuration Time 2 s all channels 35010516 05 2010 99 140 ATI 030 00 Isolation Isolation Channel to Bus 1780 VAC Q 47 63 Hz or 2500 VDC for 1 minute Notes on Specifications e Absolute accuracy includes errors from the internal CJC TC curvature offset plus gain for module temperature of 0 60 degrees C User supplied TC errors not included e For Type J and K add 1 5 degrees C inaccuracy for temperatures below 100 degrees C e Type B cannot be used below 130 degrees C 100 35010516 05 2010 140 ATI 030 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires ten contiguous 16 bit words eight for input data one for channel status and one for internal temperature of the module The data words fo
251. ifications Module Type 32 OUT 4 groups x 8 points Logic True Low External Power Us 4 5 5 5 VDC continuous Absolute Voltage Us 15 VDC for 1 3 ms decaying pulse Power Dissipation 4W Supply Current 400 mA Load Current per Point Bus Current required Module 350 mA map 2 output word Fault Detection Output Blown fuse detect loss of field power Input Rating ON level voltage 0 2 VDC max 8 75 mA sinking OFF level voltage Vout Us 1 25 V 1 mA source Vout 3 2 V min 1 mA Us 2 4 5 V Internal Pullup Resistor 440 ohm Maximum Load Current Surge Current Maximum Load Current Surge Current Each Point 75 mA sinking Each Group 600 mA Per Module 24 Surge Current max Each Point 75 mA 500 ms duration no more than 6 per minute 35010516 05 2010 321 140 DDO 153 10 Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppression internal Response Response OFF ON 250 us max resistive load ON OFF 250 us max resistive load 322 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 153 10 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal 1 A fuse for each group For the location of the fuses see figure below External No
252. ig Parameter Name Value MAPPING Y OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 TASK MAST Y P BINARY SA TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED Y VALUE 0 1 Local Qy 2 140 DRA Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping M Ox WORD MW 4X Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 16 1 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Output Type BINARY BCD Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 only if Timeout State USER DEFINED 35010516 05 2010 447 140 DRA 840 00 448 35010516 05 2010 140 DRC 830 00 Relay 8x1 Normally Open Normally Closed OUT Module 45 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DRC 830 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 450 Indicators 451 Wiring Diagram 452 Specifications 453 140 DRC 830 00 Parameter Configuration 456 35010516 05 2010 449 140 DRC 830 00
253. in 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms NOTE Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 244 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 353 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AC IN 24V 4x8 m Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT l 1X ad gt INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 BINARY M TASK MAST X 11 Local Qy 2 140 DAI Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 32 2 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 245 140 DAI 353 00 246 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 440 00 48 VAC 16x1 IN Module 23 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 440 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 248 Indicators 249 Wiring Diagram 250 Specifications 251 Parameter Configuration 253 35010516 05 2010 247 140 DAI 440 00
254. in bit and word addressing The table shows a 32 point input module in the main rack slot 4 configured with starting address 11 or IWI1 channel Bit address Bit address Bit address Bit address flat addressing topological addressing extracted from word extracted from word flat addressing topological addressing 1 l1 9611 4 1 0 IW1 15 IW1 4 1 1 15 l2 9611 4 2 0 IW1 14 96IW1 4 1 1 14 9el3 l1 4 3 0 IW1 13 IW1 4 1 1 13 15 l15 9611 4 15 0 96IW1 1 96IW1 4 1 1 1 16 l16 9611 4 16 0 IW1 0 IW1 4 1 1 0 17 96117 9611 4 17 0 IW2 15 IW1 4 1 2 15 18 118 9611 4 18 0 IW2 14 IW1 4 1 2 14 31 131 9611 4 31 0 IW2 1 IW1 4 1 2 1 32 132 9611 4 32 0 IW2 0 IW1 4 1 2 0 32 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Module Status Byte Addressing Module Status Data In addition to possible channel related diagnostics data a module related status byte may be used The status information of all modules in a Drop is administered by a table of words The starting address of this table can be entered in the configuration screen for the Drop This information is not accessible through topological addressing NOTE The status information is only available if the module supports a status byte For the meaning of the status byte check the module descriptions Example of a Drop configuration screen with the starting address of the stat
255. inal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 458 35010516 05 2010 140 DVO 853 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DVO 853 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DVO 853 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 459 140 DVO 853 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DVO 853 00 wiring diagram GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 8 0 75 A OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 16 GROUP B SUPPLY GROUP A COMMON p aum OUTPUT9 iourpur ZR Md 0 75 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 18 OUTPUT 20 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 24 GROUP C SUPPLY OUTPUT 26 OUTPUT 28 OUTPUT 30 OUTPUT 32 GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP B COMMON OUTPUT 17 OUTPUT 19 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON OUTPUT 25 OUTPUT 27 OUTPUT 29 OUTPUT 31 85616
256. ined as a device which will neither NIC NIC generate nor store more than 1 2 V 0 1 A 20 uJ or 25 mW for example switches thermocouplers LEDs RTDs etc mount mod Input 6 Input 6 2 ules of this type use only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes Note 6 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electri N C N C cal Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP12 6 Wiring Prac Input 7 Input 7 tices for Hazardous classified Locations Instrumentation Part I intrinsic Safety Note 7 Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus N C should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms N C Input 8 Input 8 Note 8 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the 1 requirements of ANSI ISA S82 01 N C N C Note 9 No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval Note 10 For Schneider Electric internal use only For control sheet N C N C refer to 19 100986 Rev 1 Note 11 For Division 2 installation the apparatus shall be installed 1 5 Module in compliance with the enclosure mounting spacing and segrega DII 330 00 tion requirements of the ultimate application including access only by Blue Terminal Strip the use of a tool and provision for Division 2 wiring methods 31001365 Rev 01 140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram 578 35010516 05 2010 140 DII 330 00 UL Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module Notes relate
257. ion is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 1 8 left columns Green The indicated output point and channel is turned ON 1 16 right two Green The indicated input point and channel is turned ON columns 35010516 05 2010 475 140 DDM 390 00 RIO Drop Location RIO Drop Location Figure The following figure shows the RIO drop location RIO DROP 908 01 04 mw CRA 932 00 NOTE If the 140 DDM 390 00 module is used a RIO drop the 140 CRA 93X 00 RIO Drop must be Version 1 04 at a minimum Check the version label see above on the top front of the 140 CRA 93X 00 module and ensure that it is at the proper revision level 476 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 390 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDM 390 00 wiring diagram N C N C N C N C PUTPUT GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 1 1 25A OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 T OUTPUT GROUP A COMMON N C N C N C N C OUTPUT GROUP B SUPPLY OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT GROUP B COMMON INPUT 2 INPUT1 INPUT 4 INPUT 3 INPUT 6 INPUT 5 INPUT 8 INPUT 7 INPUT GROUP A COMMON N C c INPUT 9 e e PUT 10 e e e i l 12 INPUT 11 l ee e d ee INPUT 13 ee X e e INPUT15
258. ions Module Type 16 IN 16 groups x 1 point External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 5 5 W max Bus Current required 180 mA map 1 input word Fault Detection None Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 50 Hz ON 85 132 VAC 11 1 mA max OFF 0 20 VAC 60 Hz ON 79 132 VAC 13 2 mA max OFF 0 20 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 2 1 mA from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition Typical Input Impedance Typical Imput Impedance 50 Hz 14 4 kohms capacitive 60 Hz 12 kohms capacitive Isolation Isolation Input to Input 1780 VAC for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute 35010516 05 2010 267 268 140 DAI 540 00 Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 132 VAC 10s 156 VAC 1 Cycle 200 VAC Response Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes NOTE Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 540 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Windo
259. ions Shields should be Note 3 Install in accordance V Sense 2 GROUND left open at the field end and with Canadian Electrical Code connected to chassis ground at Part for installation in Canadal Source 3 the ground screws on the backplane Note 4 Install in accordance V Sense 3 with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for N C installation in the United States Source 4 s SEE NOTE 1 2 Wire RTD Resisto Connection V Sense 4 9 16 10 Source 5 163 Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the termindly Sense 5 mo as possible CHASSIS Note 2 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 5 Source 6 cables of one module must bd routed separately from 1 5 cables of another module Note 3 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should Note 7 1 5 devices when Sense 7 be used for mounting this module connected to I S terminals mist satisfy the following conditiong Source 8 x 2A IAS Sources 4 SEE NOTE 1 C Ort Cui a t cable La gt Li boatie 3 Wire RTD Resisto Connection LS Module All 330 00 Note 8 This module is certifi Blue Terminal Strip H as a component for mounting n a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CS
260. ip includes the removable door and label 106 35010516 05 2010 140 AVI 030 00 Indicators Illustration Description Diagnostic The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AVI 030 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 00 A WN The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 AVI 030 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 8 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 1 8 Red Indicated channel is out of range 1 5 V Broken wire condition is detected 4 20 mA 1 To prevent improper fault indications unused inputs should have the plus and minus inputs tied together and be configured for a bipolar input range 35010516 05 2010 107 140 AVI 030 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration 4 CAUTION UNWIRED INPUTS CAUSE INVALID READINGS When configured for voltage inputs no jumper installed between INPUT and ISENSE terminals if a broken field wire occurs readings will be non zero and not predictable The field wiring terminal strip must not be removed when the module is operating Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 108 35010516 05 2010 The following figure shows the 140 AVI 030 00 wiring diagram
261. iption Mapping 96I 1x96M 0x WORD IW 3x MW 4X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 8 1 Address Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 8 1 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 494 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 690 00 Name Default Value Options Description Dual Mode DISABLE ENABLE Filter Selection 0 5 ms 1 5 ms Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 15 only enabled if Timeout State USER DEFINED 35010516 05 2010 495 140 DDM 690 00 496 35010516 05 2010 140 DAM 590 00 115 VAC 2x8 IN 2x4 OUT Module 50 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAM 590 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 498 Indicators 499 RIO Drop Location 500 Wiring Diagram 501 Specifications 503 Maintenance 506 140 DAM 590 00 Parameter Configuration 508 35010516 05 2010 497 140 DAM 590 00 Presentation Function The AC Input 115 VAC 2x8 AC Output 115 VAC 2x4 module accepts 115 VAC inputs and switches 115 VAC loads Illustration This section contains a photograph of the front panel of the 140 DAM 590 00 module The following figure shows the 140 DAM 590 00 module and its co
262. is Ground Input N C Note 1 Input 4 9 Only shielded cables should be used for connections N C Shields should be left open at the field and connected to N C chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane N C Note 2 N C N C Pins marked N C are not Input 5 4 Input 5 electronically connected to N C N C Note 3 Input 6 Input 6 All inputs are connected together internally N C Input 7 C N C Input 8 N C N C 1 5 Module DII 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram 576 35010516 05 2010 140 DII 330 00 CSA Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module Notes Related to CSA Certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters are provided per channel Vs 95V lsc 2 80 mA C4 450 nf 4 694 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 In Canada install in accordance with Canadan Electrical Code Part Note 4 In the United States install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the temi nals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 S cables of one module must be routed sepa rately from I S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the follow ing cond
263. is 1 16 A or 0 063 A fuse Fuse Type 3 AG Fast acting 1 16 A 250 V Fuse Holder 3 AG Fuse type The external fuse is not required if master override is connected to common 146 35010516 05 2010 140 AVO 020 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires four contiguous 16 bit words words formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data W for output data The data Word 4 Channel 4 data Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 AVO 020 00 Output Module Point Object Comment Output 1 9eQW w eVr m 1 Value Output 2 QW b e r m 2 Value Output 3 QW b e r m 3 Value Output 4 QW b e r m 4 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot Map Status Byte There is no I O map status byte used by the 140 AVO 020 00 Output Module 35010516 05 2010 147 140 AVO 020 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AN OUT 4CH VOLT M Config Parameter Name MAPPING Value WORD MW 4x OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 4 TASK MAST v CHANNELS C CHANNEL1 LAST VALUE v TIMEOUT VALUE 0 v GI CHANNEL2 LAST VALUE Y CHANNELS LAST VALUE Y
264. is across the Signal and V pins of each channel V is internally connected to I S ground Note 3 Three Wire Transmitters should be provided power only from the module An external power supply should not be used Note 4 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 5 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules 140 CPU xxx xx 140 CPS xx xx 140 All 330 10 Wiring Diagram 35010516 05 2010 545 140 AII 330 10 Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12 Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area Fixed Wiring System The Quantum 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin fixed position blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment The module s 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module The keying assignment is given below Module Cl
265. it the corresponding output is automatically switched to the OFF state by the module disjunction and maintained OFF during at least 10 seconds To recover the control of the output it is necessary to set by application the overloaded output command of the module to the OFF state 35010516 05 2010 623 140 SDO 953 00S The following diagram shows the register of the third input word If bit 15 is set to 1 it means that f the internal checks have detected a malfunction of channel 1 etc Word 3 __ 1 Channel 1 unsafe 1 Channel 2 unsafe 1 Channel unsafe 1 2 Channel 4 unsafe 1 Channel 5 unsafe __ 1 Channel 6 unsafe __1 Channel 7 unsafe 1 Channel 8 unsafe 15 14 13 12111109 8 7 6 5 41312 1110 1 Channel 9 unsafe 1 Channel 10 unsafe 1 Channel 11 unsafe 1 Channel 12 unsafe 1 Channel 13 unsafe 1 Channel 14 unsafe 1 Channel 15 unsafe 1 Channel 16 unsafe On word 4 bit 15 is dedicated to the Process Power supply Error It is set to 1 if the external power supply is no longer detected On word 4 bit 14 is dedicated to the System Shut Down It is set to 1 if the module has detected a malfunction from its host In that case the module is safe and shuts down The other bits on word 4 and words 5 and 6 are used by the module for intern
266. ith the host F Red ON An internal diagnostic error is detected OFF No internal diagnostic error is detected Channel LED 1 16 Green ON The channel is ON OFF The channel is OFF Red ON Inoperative channel or broken wire detected OFF Operative channel and wire 35010516 05 2010 603 140 SDI 953 00S Wiring Diagram Precautions It is recommended to use a process power supply which does not recover automatically after a disjunction Use for instance 24VDC 10A ABL8 RPS24100 in manual mode CAUTION OVERCURRENT TO THE INPUTS Use fast acting fuses to protect the electronic components of the module from overcurrent Improper fuse selection could result to damage to the module Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 604 35010516 05 2010 140 SDI 953 00S Illustration The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 SDI 953 00S module input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 common 24V input 5 input 6 input 7 input 8 common 24V input 9 input 10 input 11 input 12 common 24V input 13 input 14 input 15 input 16 common 24V input 6 input _ input 8 common OV input 9 input 10 amp amp GIG C input 11 input 12 i common 0V input 13 G8 input 14
267. itions Voc Vmax lc i lax Ca Ccable La gt Li Leable Note 8 This module is certified as a compo nent for mounting in a suitable enclo sure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the juridiction NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION 1 5 8 N C Input 2 N C Input 3 N C Input 4 N C Input 6 Input 6 N C Input 7 N C Input 8 N C N C 1 5 Module DII 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 31001365 Rev 00 Input 1 Input 1 HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUP A B C D cet SEE NOTE 1 1 5 Field Device Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electronically connected to the module Note 3 Only Quantum 140 XBP oX oo backplanes should be used for mounting this module 140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram 35010516 05 2010 577 140 DII 330 00 FM Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connectio with IS RTD TC IN Module with Concept P
268. itive 60 Hz 5 6 kohms capacitive Isolation Isolation Typical Imput Impedance Group to Group 1780 VAC for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute 35010516 05 2010 259 140 DAI 453 00 Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 56 VAC 10s 63 VAC 1 Cycle 100 VAC Response Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes NOTE Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 260 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 453 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AC IN 48V 4x8 M Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT 9 1 1 INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 EB p BINARY M TASK MAST 1 Local QU 2 140 DAIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting Address 1 1 Inputs Ending Address 32 2 Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module in other AUXO module in other than than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUXS 35010516 05 2010 261 140 DAI 453 00 262 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 5
269. itive load t 10 ms Minimum Load Current Minimum Load Current Each Point 50 mA Note Minimum load Current if the contact is used at rated loads of 5 150 VDC or 20 250 VDC OFF State Leakage lt 100 uA 35010516 05 2010 445 140 DRA 840 00 Isolation Isolation Output to Output 1780 VAC rms for one minute Field to Bus 1780 VAC rms for one minute 2500 for one minute Response Response OFF ON 10 ms max ON OFF 20 ms max Relay Relay Relay type Form A Contact Protection Varistor 275 V internal Mechanical Operations 10 000 000 Electrical Operations 200 000 resistive load max Voltage and Current Electrical Operations 30 150 VDC 100 000 300 mA resistive load see note below 50 000 500 mA resistive load 100 000 100 mA L R 10 msec 100 000 Interposing Relay Westinghouse Style 606B Westinghouse type SG Struthers Dunn 219 x 13 XP Switching Capability 500 VA resistive load Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes NOTE Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using external contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load 446 35010516 05 2010 140 DRA 840 00 140 DRA 840 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window RELAY OUT 16x1 NO Conf
270. ivolt module Number of Channels 8 IN TC Types and Ranges Types Ranges C 210 760 270 1370 270 1000 270 400 50 1665 50 1665 130 1820 Millivolt Ranges 100 mV 100 mV 25 mV 25 mV Open circuit detect can be disabled these ranges TC Circuit Resistance Max Source Resistance 200 ohms max for rated accuracy Input Impedance gt 1M ohms Input Filter Single low pass nominal 20 Hz Plus notch filter at 50 60 Hz Normal Noise Rejection 120 dB min 50 or 60 Hz Cold Junction Compensation Internal CJC operates 0 60 C errors are included in the CJC accuracy specification The connector door must be closed Remote CJC can be implemented by connecting the TC which monitors the external junction block temperature to channel 1 Types J K and T are recommended for best accuracy Resolution TC Ranges Choice of 1 degree C Default 0 1 degree C 1 degree F 0 1 degree F Millivolt Ranges 100 mV range 3 05 microvolts 16 bits 25 mV range 0 76 microvolts 16 bits TC Absolute Accuracy see Not e 1 Types J K E T see Note 2 2 C 0 1 of reading Types S R B see Note 3 4 C 0 1 of reading Millivolt Absolute Accuracy 25 20 microvolts 0 1 of reading Accuracy Drift w Temperature 0 15 microvolts
271. jury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in death or serious injury 35010516 05 2010 15 PLEASE NOTE A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in minor or moderate injury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in equipment damage Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical equipment and the installation and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved 16 35010516 05 2010 About the Book At a Glance Document Scope This documentation is a reference for the discrete and analog I O hardware of the Quantum automation system with Unity Pro Validity Note This documentation is valid from Unity Pro v5 0 Product Related Information A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program install alte
272. ked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to Note 5 the module To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be Note 4 grounded and must extend as Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 close to the terminals as backplanes should be used for possible mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules Note 6 140 CPU 140 CPS Intrinsically Safe 1 S cables of one module must be routed separately from S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Voc 5 Vinax lc 5 Imax 1 5 Module Ca gt Cage 140 DIO 330 00 La Li Leable Blue Terminal Strip 31001366 Rev 00 140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram 35010516 05 2010 569 140 DIO 330 00 Fixed Wiring System The Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Output module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin fixed position blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires Acceptable field wire gauges go from AWG 20 to AWG 12 Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment The module s 140 XTS 332 00
273. l is OFF Red ON Inoperable channel and or overload detected on the channel OFF Channel operative 35010516 05 2010 615 140 SDO 953 00S Wiring Diagram Precautions It is mandatory to use a process power supply which does not recover automatically after a disjunction Use for instance 24 VDC 10 A ABL8 RPS24100 in manual mode 4 CAUTION OVERCURRENT TO THE OUTPUTS Use fast acting fuses to protect the electronic components of the module from overcurrent Improper fuse selection could result to damage to the module Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 616 35010516 05 2010 140 SDO 953 00S Illustration The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 SDO 953 00S module fuse output 1 2 O output 1 Pre act output 2 4 3 output 2 pre act output 3 6 5 output 3 dl output 4 7 output 4 24V process supply common 0V output 5 G2 Ga outputs ry output 6 13 dcs output 7 5 output 7 pre act output 8 OD output 8 ei 24 process supply 19 commonoV output 9 Q2 en output 9 pre act output 10 3 output 10 pre act output 11 26 5 11 pre act output 12 7 output 12 pre act 24V process supply Go G comment 13 DD output 13 pre act output 4 Ga 63 ou
274. lWr m c 0 Int VALUE 9elr m c 1 Bool ERROR 9elr m c 2 Bool WARNING Used abbreviations r rack m module slot c channel b bus e equipment drop Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off NOTE In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for 1 Q Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 AMM 090 00 Input Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 6 5 4 13 2 1 Channel 1 output broken wire Channel 2 output broken wire Not used L Not used Channel 1 input over range or under range Channel 2 input over range or under range Channel 3 input over range or under range Channel 4 input over range or under range 35010516 05 2010 165 140 AMM 090 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AN 4CH IN 2CH OUT 11 Local 2 140 AMM Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD 95IW 3x 9 MW INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 5 OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 2 TASK MAST DATA FORMAT 16 bit format 4 i INPUTRANGE CHANNEL1 NOT ISTALLED sd CHANNEL2 NOT ISTALLED ivi CHANNELS NOT ISTALLED m CHANNEL4 NOT ISTALL
275. le Type 4 Channel OUT External Power Loop Voltage 12 30 VDC up to 60 VDC with an external loop resistor Bus Current required Module 480 mA Power Dissipation 5 3 W max map 4 output words Error Detection Open circuit in 4 20 mA mode Specific channel is identified when an open circuit is detected through the red channel LED Voltage Loop Voltage 12 30 VDC up to 60 VDC with an external loop resistor Loop Resistance Rmn oop 30 VDC 0 02 A Rmax V oop 7 0 02 A No Hay is required for loop voltage less than 30 VDC Internal Voltage Drop 7 VDC min 30 VDC max 20 mA Resolution Conversion Resolution Resolution 12 bit Accuracy Error at 25 degrees C 0 20 of full scale Accuracy Drift with Temperature Typical 0 004 of full scale degrees C Maximum 0 007 of full scale degrees C Linearity 1 LSB Update Time 3 ms for all Channels simultaneous update Settling time 900 us to 0 1 of final value 124 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 020 00 Isolation Isolation Channel to Bus 1780 VAC Q 47 63 Hz or 2500 VDC for 1 minute Channel to Channel 500 VAC Q 47 63 Hz or 750 VDC for 1 minute Fuses Fuses Internal Not required External NOTE When the green channel status LEDs are off the loop current i
276. lectrical Operations 200 000 resistive load max Voltage and Current Electrical Operations 30 150 VDC 100 000 300 mA resistive load see note below 50 000 500 mA resistive load 100 000 100 mA L R 10 msec 100 000 Interposing Relay Westinghouse Style 606B Westinghouse type SG Struthers Dunn 219 x 13 XP Switching Capability 500 VA reistive load Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes NOTE Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using external contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load 35010516 05 2010 455 140 DRC 830 00 140 DRC 830 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window RELAY OUT 8x1 NO NC 75 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 8 TASK MAST ad P P BINARY TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED Y VALUE o 11 Local Qy 2 140 DRG Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT M Ox WORD MW 4X Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 8 1 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Output Type BINARY Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 on
277. ly if Timeout State USER DEFINED 456 35010516 05 2010 140 DVO 853 00 10 30 VDC 32x1 Verified OUT Module 46 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DVO 853 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 458 Indicators 459 Wiring Diagram 460 Specifications 461 Maintenance 463 Addressing 464 Parameter Configuration 466 35010516 05 2010 457 140 DVO 853 00 Presentation Function The Quantum 140 DVO 853 00 is a 10 30 VDC 32 point output module with diagnostic capability The module will detect and report the output state sensed at the field connector and depending on the selected configuration will verify that the output point is in the state commanded by the PLC The module is configured in four groups of eight outputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DVO 853 00 module and its components A 6 2 eq NU 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring term
278. mA This module detects broken wires on a per channel basis indicates their location on the front panel LEDs and transmits the status to the PLC Illustration The following figure shows the140 AIO 330 00 module and its components 140 aoso 01 14 Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door oahwh 552 35010516 05 2010 140 AIO 330 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AIO 330 00 module Active Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 AIO 330 00 module LEDs Color Indication When On Active Green Communicating with the PLC F Red A broken wire 4 20 mA only or out of range condition on any channel 1 8 A broken wire or out of range condition on the indicated channel 35010516 05 2010 553 140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagrams CSA Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to CSA certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Voc
279. mWich Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end Chassis Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electronically connected to the module Note 3 To mount modules of this type use only 140 XBP Oxx 00 backplanes Note 4 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of Intrinsically Safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically exam ined in combination as a system when the approved values of Yoc and lse for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the 1 5 apparatus and the approved values of C and L for the associated apparatus must be equal to or greater than C and L for the 1 5 apparatus plus all cable param eters Ca gt Ci Coane La gt Li Leable lt Vra ISC lt Imax Note 5 Simple apparatus is defined as a device which will nei ther generate nor store more than 1 2 V 0 1 A 20 uJ or 25 mW for example switches thermocouplers LEDs RTDs etc mount modules of this type use only 140 XBP Oxx 00 backplanes Note 6 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP12 6 Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations Instru mentation Part intrinsic Safety Note 7 Control room equipment connected to associated appa ratus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms Note 8 All m
280. max resistive load output Module Protection Module Protection Input Protection Resistor limited Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppression internal 480 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 390 00 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Input Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes Output Internal 5 A fuse for each group For the location of the fuses see figure below External 1 25 A fuse Littlefuse 3121 25 1 25 A 250 V 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module sensors and pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 1 25 A 250 V fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 35010516 05 2010 481 140 DDM 390 00 Illustration The following figure shows the fuse locations of the 140 DDM 390 00 module PON 140 DDM 390 00 Fuse Locations B Points 5 8 482 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 390 00 140 DDM 390 00 Parameter Config
281. meter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window RTD IN 8CH Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD 951W 3x INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 9 TASK MAST r MODULE_CONFIGURATION RESOLUTION 1 0 Deg x OUTPUT UNIT Centigrade Y 7 VALUE TYPE Temp z CHANNELS E CHANNEL1 DISABLE No M WIRE 4 wire Y TYPE Pt 100 200 to 850 v CHANNEL2 CHANNELS CHANNEL4 CHANNELS CHANNEL6 CHANNEL7 tl CHANNEL8 71 2 140 ARIJ 35010516 05 2010 89 140 ARI 030 10 Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting Address 1 Inputs Ending Address 9 Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST Grayed if module in other AUXO if module in than local AUX1 other than AUX2 local AUXS Module Configuration Resolution 1 0 Deg 0 1 Deg Output Unit Centigrade Fahrenheit Value Type Temp Raw Value Channels Channel1 Disable No Yes Wire 4 wire 2 wire 3 wire Type Pt 100 200 to 850 Pt 200 200 to 850 Pt 500 200 to 850 Pt 1000 200 to 850 Ni 100 200 to 850 Ni 200 200 to 850 Ni 500 200 to 850 Ni 1000 200 to 850 R 0 to 766 66 ohms R 0 to 4000 ohms Apt 100 100 to 450 ohms Apt 200 100 to 450 ohms Apt 500 10
282. mponents Iz Dam 9000 7 Ny oll Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 498 35010516 05 2010 140 DAM 590 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAM 590 00 module oak OND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAM 590 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 1 8 left columns Green The indicated output point and channel is turned ON 1 16 right two Green The indicated input point and channel is turned ON columns 35010516 05 2010 499 140 DAM 590 00 RIO Drop Location RIO Drop Location Figure The following figure shows the RIO drop location RIO DROP 908 01 04 mw CRA 932 00 mal NOTE If the 140 DAM
283. n 407 35010516 05 2010 399 140 DAO 840 10 Presentation Function The AC Output 24 115 VAC 16x1 module switches 24 115 VAC powered loads Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 10 module and its components MI 6 2 _ Ona NEU S E 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 400 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 840 10 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 840 10 module Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 oak OWN 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fa 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 840 10 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 1 16 Red There is an error on the indicated point or channel
284. n block temperature to channel 1 Types J K and T are recommended for remote CJC Resolution Resolution TC Ranges 1 degree C default 0 1 degree C 1 degree F 0 1 degree F Millivolt Ranges 100 mV range 3 05 uV 16 bit 25 mV range 0 76 uV 16 bit 98 35010516 05 2010 140 ATI 030 00 Absolute Accuracy Update and Configuration Time 4 CAUTION RISK OF TEMPORARY INVALID INITIAL INPUT TEMPERATURE VALUE Delay the temperature input processing by 2 seconds in the application e after the 140 ATI 030 00 health bit has changed from 0 to 1 e after a power cycle warm restart if the 140 ATI 030 00 is in the local rack Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage A CAUTION RISK OF TEMPORARY INVALID INITIAL INPUT STATUS INFORMATION Delay the channel status information processing by 2 seconds in the application e after the 140 ATI 030 00 health bit has changed from O to 1 e after a power cycle warm restart if the 140 ATI 030 00 is in the local rack Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE The 140 ATI 030 00 temperature input processing hardware requires a relatively long time to configure This effect must be taken into account during special cases e When the PLC is in RUN mode and the module becomes power cycled e When the PLC is in RUN mode and the module is hot swapped In these cases t
285. n injury or equipment damage 506 35010516 05 2010 140 DAM 590 00 The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DAM 590 00 module 140 DDO 843 00 Fuse Locations Points 5 8 35010516 05 2010 507 140 DAM 590 00 140 DAM 590 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window AC IN OUT 115V 16 8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT M OX he INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 8 TASK MAST INPUT TYPE BINARY M t P P BINARY Y TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED VALUE 1 LocalQj 2 140 DAM 508 35010516 05 2010 140 DAM 590 00 Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT l 1x M Ox WORD IW 3x MW 4X Inputs Starting Address A 1 Inputs Ending Address Outputs Starting Address EF Outputs Ending Address Task Grayed if module in other than local MAST FAST AUXO AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 fixed to MAST if module in other than local Input Type BINARY Output Type BINARY Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State USER DEFINED 35010516 05 2010 509
286. ne 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module sensors and pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm power is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 35010516 05 2010 323 140 DDO 153 10 Illustration The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the 140 DDO 153 10 module N Fuse Locations 1 8 Points 9 16 Points 17 24 re N Points Y D 25 32 324 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 153 10 140 DDO 153 10 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window DC OUT 5V 4x8 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING M OX Yi OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 TASK MAST BINARY Y TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED 1 0 VALUE 2 0 QT Local QU 2 140 DDG Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT M Ox WORD MW 4X Output Starting 1 1 Address Output Ending 32 2 Address Output Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other than in other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Timeout State USERDEFINED Hol
287. nse 2 Ground Source 3 V Sense 3 N C 1 Source 4 V Sense 4 Source 5 VSense5 NT7N VSense5 See Note 1 e mV Source N C Source 6 Chassis Ground Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connec tions Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane V Sense 6 1 Source 8 Note 2 Thermocouple tip may be grounded if required Source 8 V Sense 8 V Sense 8 Note 3 Pins marked Not Connected are not electronically connecled to the module LS Module All 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 35010516 05 2010 521 140 All 330 00 CSA Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD resistor connection Notes related to NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION CSA certification Class 1 Division 1 for this module Group A B C D SEE NOTE 1 Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Voe 15 5 V 123 mA 4 Wire RTD Resisto Ca 0 47 uf Source 1 2116 OL Source 1 Connection La 1 0 mH Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V cables should be used for CHASSIS connect
288. nside door ouhwWhnd 540 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 10 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 All 330 10 module Active Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 All 330 10 module LEDs Color Indication When On Active Green Communicating with the PLC F Red A broken wire 4 20 mA only or out of range condition on any channel 1 8 A broken wire or out of range condition on the indicated channel 35010516 05 2010 541 140 AII 330 10 Wiring Diagrams Cenelec Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for the 140 All 330 10 instrinsically safe current input module CENELEC CERTIFICATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION Entity Parameters NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION ZONE 1 per Channel GROUP IIA IIB IIC Vo 23 8 Vdc lo 112 mA ch Po 622 mW ch Co 127 nf ch Lo 2 9 mH ch mA mA ms m e mim Em em SEE NOTE 1 TRANSMITTER umma SEE NOTE 1 1 5 2 WIRE TRANSMITTER Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connec tions Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Note 2 A dropping resistor 100 Ohms is across the signal and V pins of each channel V is internally connected to 1 5 ground Note 3 Three wire transmitt
289. nt inputs Illustration The following figure shows the140 ACI 040 00 module and its components ACI040 00 2 Gm Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label oa hWnd 70 35010516 05 2010 140 ACI 040 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ACI 040 00 module Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 oak OWN 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fa 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ACI 040 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected Diagnostics 1 Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED To avoid this occurence the unused channels should be configured in the 0 25 ma range 2 This module produces an error signal F if any channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4 20
290. ntation 486 Indicators 487 Wiring Diagram 489 Specifications 491 140 DDM 690 00 Parameter Configuration 494 35010516 05 2010 485 140 DDM 690 00 Presentation Function The 125 VDC High Power IN OUT module provides four isolated outputs and four grouped inputs The outputs switch 24 to 125 VDC powered loads and are for use with sink and source devices The outputs also have short circuit sense indication and shutdown circuitry The inputs accept 125 VDC inputs and are for use with source output devices The inputs have software selectable response times to provide additional input filtering Illustration This section contains a photograph of the front panel of the 140 DDM 690 00 module The following figure shows the I O module and its components toners 6 2 1 Ip 0 Omn aM N hy A E 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label NOTE The following information baselines minimum version levels that will support this module
291. o 1 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 422 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 20 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 842 20 module Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 842 20 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 1 4 The indicated group has a blown fuse or field 5 8 power 9 12 13 16 35010516 05 2010 423 140 DAO 842 20 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 20 wiring diagram OUTPUT N C OUTPUT N C OUTPUT se INDUCTIVE LOAD OUTPUT N C GROUP A HOT GROUP A COMMON OUTPUT pte ETM N C i VAS OUTPUT R N C AW OUTPUT 24 2240 Vac OUTPUT a aoe gl e aE A Output protection example GROUP
292. o not take place and the modules does not start Runtime Diagnostics During runtime the I O modules perform self tests The input modules verify that they are able to read data from the sensors over the complete range The output modules perform pulse tests on their switches with a duration lower than 1 ms 35010516 05 2010 587 General Information Description of the General Over Voltage Diagnostics Because the electronics may not work up to the theoretical maximum output voltage of the power supplies the I O modules must supervise the backplane power supply voltage The following table describes the supervision of the power supply The power supply of Is monitored by the backplane which has a theoretical maximum output voltage of 18 5 V 2 over voltage supervisors that is 1 for each micro processor system Each supervisor is able to handle a possible over voltage by opening its power switch and triggering its reset block which manages transitions between the states of power on and power off and resets both processors when active the field side which is generated by DC to DC converters 2 over and under voltage supervisors that is 1 for each micro processor system If the 2 isolated DC to DC converters generating the power supply to the field side electronics experience a fault the supervisors signal this condition to its particular processor through an isolator the process which i
293. odules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA 82 01 Note 9 No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval Note 10 For Schneider Electric internal use only For control sheet refer to 19 100986 Rev 0 568 35010516 05 2010 140 DIO 330 00 UL Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module Notes Related to UL Certifi NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION cation for this module Note 1 Entity parameters are pro vided per channel Vo 27 9V log 119 C 84 nf L 1 0 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown the fol lowing values must be used for Ccable and Lcable Capacitance 60 Pf ft 1 5 24 NO LOAD Output 1 Output 1 Chassis Ground CLASS 1 DIMSION 1 Group A B C D ole See Notes 1 amp 2 1 5 Field Device Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and con nected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Inductance 0 20 uH ft Note 2 All negative output terminals Note 4 Output 1 thru Output 8 are Install in accordance with the internally connected to I S ground NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installa tion in the United States Note 3 Pins mar
294. oken wire on one or more input channels 114 35010516 05 2010 140 AVI 030 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window AN IN 8CH BIPOLAR Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD 5IW 3x INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 9 TASK MAST DATA FORMAT 16 bit format I CHANNELS i gt CHANNEL1 10V TO 10V i CHANNEL2 10V TO 10V v CHANNEL3 10V TO 10V vi CHANNEL4 10V TO 10V Y CHANNEL5 10V TO 10 6 10V TO 10V CHANNEL 10V TO 10V M CHANNEL8 10V TO 10V 1 Local 2 140 AVI Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting Address 1 Inputs Ending Address 9 Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module in other AUXO module in other than than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Data Format 16 bit format Volt Meter 12 bit format Channels Channel1 10 TO 10V 10V TO 10V OV TO 10V 5V TO 5V OV TO 5V 1V TO 5V 20 mA TO 20mA Channel2 Channel8 see Channel1 35010516 05 2010 115 140 AVI 030 00 116 35010516 05 2010 Analog OUT Modules Introduction The following part provides information on the Quantum Analog OUT modules What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters
295. old Junction Temperature 9elIW W b eVr m 10 Remote Cold Junction Temperature Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot The 140 All 330 00 Input Module uses the T ANA IN VWE IODDT IODDT Name Object Data Type Name T ANA IN VWE CHf b e r m c ANA IN VWE userdefined 9elWr m c 0 Int VALUE 9elr m c 1 Bool ERROR 9elr m c 2 Bool WARNING Used abbreviations r rack m module slot c channel b bus e equipment drop Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off NOTE In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for 1 0 35010516 05 2010 533 140 AII 330 00 I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 All 330 00 Input Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 16 15 413 12 11 Channel 1 out of range or short circuit Channel 2 out of range or short circuit Channel 3 out of range or short circuit Channel 4 out of range or short circuit Channel 5 out of range or short circuit Channel 6 out of range or short circuit Channel 7 out of range or short circuit Channel 8 out of range or short circuit 534 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values RTD Parameter Configuration Window RTD
296. ollowing I O modules e ACI 030 00 e All 330 10 e ACI 040 00 e ACI 040 00 IODDT for analog input modules supporting Value and Error Object Symbol Rank Description 9elW VALUE 0 Input value 9el ERROR 1 Input error T ANA IN VWE T ANA IN VWE is used with all channels of the following I O modules e ARI 030 10 e AVI 030 00 e ATI 030 00 e All 330 00 and e Channels 3 and 4 of AMM 090 00 IODDT for analog input modules supporting Value Warning and Error Object Symbol Rank Description 9elW VALUE 0 Input value 9el ERROR 1 Input error 9el WARNING 2 Input warning 35010516 05 2010 29 Addressing Modes T ANA BI VWE T ANA BI VWI e Channels 1 and 2 of AMM 090 00 IODDT for bidirectional analog modules supporting Value Warning and Error E is used with the following I O modules Object Symbol Rank Description 9elW VALUE IN 0 Input value QW VALUE_OUT 0 Output value 91 ERROR IN 1 Input error 91 WARNING 2 Input warning Al ERROR_OUT 3 Output error T_CNT_105 T CNT 105is used with all channels of the following I O modules e EHC 105 Specific IODDT for high speed counter module EHC 105 Object Symbol Rank Description AIW VALUE_L 1 Input value Low word AIW VALUE_H 2 Input value High word 91 ERROR 1 Error in Counter Al SP_FINAL 2 Final Set Point signal 9el SP FI
297. ollowing table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 842 10 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 1 4 The indicated group has a blown fuse or field 5 8 power 9 12 13 16 35010516 05 2010 411 140 DAO 842 10 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 DAO 842 10 module OUTPUT 1 L N C Optional OUTPUT2 Fuse OU NIC 4 OUTPUT3 1 N C INDUCTIVE OUTPUT 4 LOAD N C GROUP A HOT GROUPACOMMON 4 OUTPUT 5 m N C a IE OUTPUT 6 N C i OUTPUT 7 N C OUTPUT 8 24 240 Vac Ng Output protection example GROUP B HOT GROUPBCOMMON see note OUTPUT 9 N C ie OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 11 N C OUTPUT 12 N C GROUP C HOT GROUP C COMMON OUTPUT 13 N C OUTPUT 14 N C OUTPUT 15 N C OUTPUT 16 N C GROUP D HOT GROUP D COMMON 1 N C Not Connected 2 This module is not polarity sensitive 3 When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 412 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 842 10 4 CAUTION MODULE OUTPUT DAMAGE e Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common single phase AC power source
298. ollowing topics Topic Page Presentation 154 Indicators 155 Wiring Diagram 156 Specifications 159 Addressing 163 Parameter Configuration 166 35010516 05 2010 153 140 AMM 090 00 Presentation Function The Analog In Out 4 2 bi directional module combines four analog inputs which accept a mix of current and voltage with two isolated analog outputs that control and monitor current in 4 20 mA loops Illustration The following figure shows the 140 AMM 090 00 module and its components 00 Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Fuse Cutouts Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 154 35010516 05 2010 140 AMM 090 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions Diagnostic The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AMM 090 00 module Active The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 AMM 090 00 module LEDs Color
299. olor Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 8 Green Module outputs switched ON 1 8 Red Broken wire on indicated channels Diagnostic 1 Unused outputs may cause the activation of the F fault LED To avoid this occurrence the unused channels should be configured in the 0 25 mA range 2 At power up channel outputs are all at zero current 0 mA 35010516 05 2010 131 140 ACO 130 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the 140 ACO 130 00 module Field Device OUTPUT 1 SINK Field Devic RETURN MONITOR 1 MS T ele RETURN OUTPUT 2 SINK NC RETURN OUTPUT 3 SINK Field Device RETURN OUTPUT 4 SINK Field Devic Field Devic NC RETURN OUTPUT 5 SINK amp C565 Ho RETURN OUTPUT 6 SINK Field Device Field Devic NC RETURN OUTPUT 7 SINK RETURN OUTPUT 8 SINK Field Devic 24Vdc loop supply NC NC MONITOR 2 NC NC MONITOR 3 NC MONITOR 4 NC NC MONITOR 5 NC MONITOR 6 NC NC MONITOR 7 amp amp amp amp amp 8 amp am
300. on The following figure shows the 140 DAI 453 00 wiring diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 1 L ji N id A INPUT 4 INPUT 3 _ INPUT 6 INPUT 5 i e INPUT 8 INPUT 7 GROUP A COMMON N C INPUT 10 INPUT 9 INPUT 12 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 INPUT 13 INPUT 16 INPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON N C MEM INPUT 18 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 INPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON N C INPUT 26 INPUT 25 INPUT 28 INPUT 27 INPUT 30 INPUT 29 INPUT 32 INPUT 31 GROUP D COMMON N C LL NOTE This module is not polarity sensitive Not Connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 258 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 453 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 IN 4 groups x 8 points External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 10 9 W max Bus Current required 250 mA map 2 input words Fault Detection None Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 50 Hz ON 34 56 VAC 9 8 mA max OFF 0 10 VAC 60 Hz ON 29 56 VAC 11 7 mA max OFF 0 10 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition 1 7 mA Typical Input Impedance 50 Hz 6 8 kohms capac
301. on is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction NON HAZARDOUS See Note 2 N C v2c N C N C 7 NIC 1 5 Module All 330 10 Blue Terminal Strip 31001363 Rev 00 transmitter sm V o HAZARDOUS LOCATION ZONE 1 GROUP IIA IIB IIC LOCATION SEE NOTE m Chassis Ground See Note 1 uA A m o SEE NOTE 1 5 2 wire transmitter Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Chassis Ground See Note 1 Note 2 A dropping resistor 100 Ohms is across the signal and V pins of each channel V is internally connected to 1 5 ground Note 3 Three wire transmitters should be provided power only from the module An external power supply should not be used Note 4 Pins marked Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 5 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module 140 All 330 10 Wiring Diagram 35010516 05 2010 543 140 All 330 10 FM Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet note 6 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 5 appropriate
302. on the rack at the module end and left open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area The instruction sheet packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring diagram applicable to that type of module 35010516 05 2010 515 General Information Intrinsically Safe Wiring Diagram The following diagram illustrates a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module using a separate raceway to isolate its external wiring to the hazardous area This is just one of the possible ways of field wiring the module Other methods would include bundling and laying the intrinsically safe wires in the same wiring trough with the bundled non intrinsically safe wires with each bundle tied down and separated by minimum of two inches of air space through out the wiring runs SAFE WIRING IN SEPARATE BLUE RACEWAY 1 BACKPLANE S PST C STD STDISTD TS3 Intrinsically Safe P s 2 D D ALE 0 R E LIL STANDARD I O WIRING U R o S E A INTRINSICALLY m B A x LX g INTRINSICALLY A SAFE WIRING LABELS Questions Regarding Intrinsically Safe Wiring Practices The information concerning intrinsic safety wiring practices is general and is not intended to cover installation requirements for any specific site Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring requirements for your site should be
303. onents See 6 2 1 o GE NEU Y Bo 1 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 432 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 853 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 853 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 853 00 modul LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 433 140 DAO 853 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAO 853 00 wiring diagram OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 2 4 OPTIONAL N L OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 3 bg OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 5 INDUCTIVE OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT 7 LOAD ee E T DAN GROUP A HOT 9 NC no OUTPUT 10 OUTPUTS A ee 162 t nen OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 11 moo
304. ons will result in death or serious injury 4 CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output Use an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent in parallel with the switch Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE When field wiring the I O modules the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG NOTE The output protection is composed of an RC filter snubber filter and a varistor e The snubber filter is optional The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the device used e Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage required by the device used 502 35010516 05 2010 140 DAM 590 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 IN 2 groups x 8 points 8 OUT 2 groups x 4 points External Power 85 132 VAC required for output groups Power Dissipation 5 5 W 1 1 V x Total module load current Bus Current required 250 mA map 1 input word 0 5 output word Fault Detection Input None Output Blown fuse detect loss of field power Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 50 Hz ON 85 132 VAC 11
305. ontiguous I references or as one word For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14 15 Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 16 Point Input Modules I O Map Status Byte Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point VO Object Comment Input 1 9el Vo eV r m 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 Value Input 15 9el Vo eVr m 15 Value Input 16 9el Vo eVr m 16 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point Object Comment Inputword 1 9eIW Wb eVr m 1 1 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot There is no I O map status byte associated with these modules 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes 24 Point Input Module There is only one 24 point input module e 140 DDI 673 00 DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink Flat Addressing The input module listed above can be configured as either 24 contiguous discrete input 3I reference or as 2 contiguous 1W input words in the following format For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB First Word Input Pointi 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 MSB Second Word Input Point 17
306. ord Fault Detection Input None Output Blown fuse detect loss of field power Absolute Maximum Input Voltage Output Input Rating ON level voltage 15 30 VDC ON level current 2 0 mA min OFF leve voltage 3 5 VDC OFF level current 0 5 mA max Internal Resistance 2 5 kohm Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 30 VAC 1 3 ms 56 VAC decaying pulse Voltage Output Operating Voltage max 19 2 30 VDC Absolute Voltage max 56 VDC for 1 3 ms decaying voltage pulse ON State Drop Point 0 4 VDC 0 5A 35010516 05 2010 479 140 DDM 390 00 Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point 0 5A Each Group 2 0A Per Module 4A OFF State Leakage Point 0 4 mA Q 30 VDC Surge Current max Each Point 5 A 500 ms duration no more than 6 per minute Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance Capacitance max Load Inductance max 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or _ 05 where L Load inductance henry L 2 F l Load current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance max 50 microF Isolation Isolation Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Response Input and Output Response Input and Output OFF ON 1 ms max resistive load output ON OFF 1 ms
307. ow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 608 35010516 05 2010 140 SDI 953 00S Addressing Overview The following information describes how the data exchanged between the 140 SDI 953 00S module and the processor module are mapped Except for the health word the data described here are transferred from the 140 SDI 953 00S module using the Quantum global backplane communication access mechanism which is common to all Quantum modules NOTE 7 words are necessary for this module 1 word dedicated to channel values e 1 word dedicated to wiring problems e 1 word dedicated to channel state valid invalid channel e 1 word dedicated to power supply status and exchange number which is used by the module 2 words used by the module CRC 1 health word this word is accessible by the processor module only Flat Addressing The following diagram shows the register of word 1 On bit 15 you read the input value of channel 1 on bit 14 you read the input value of channel 2 and so on Word 1 __ 1 Input value on channel 1 1 Input value on channel 2 1 Input value on channel 3 __ 1 zInput value on channel 4 1 Input value on channel 5 __ 1 Input value on channel 6 1 Input value on channel 7 1 Input value on channel 8 15 14 13 12 11 109 6 5 4 13211 0 1 Input value on
308. ows the LED descriptions for the 140 DSI 353 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 305 140 DSI 353 00 Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram Wiring diagram for the 140 DSI 353 00 Module INPUT 4 2 3 INPUT 3 t e INPUT 6 6 5 INPUT 5 gii 56 KQ INPUT 8 T INPUT 7 GROUP A SUPPLY 9 GROUP A COMMON e INPUT 10 12 1 INPUT 9 INPUT 12 13 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 48 INPUT 13 SHO 56KQ _ INPUT 16 7 INPUT 15 e GROUP B SUPPLY GROUP B COMMON e INPUT 18 2 9 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 23 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 25 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 27 INPUT 23 GROUP C SUPPLY GROUP C COMMON INPUT 26 82 G INPUT 25 INPUT 28 34 33 INPUT 27 INPUT 30 65 INPUT 29 INPUT 32 G7 INPUT 31 GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP D COMMON Recommended resistor value for 24V DC NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 306 35010516 05 2010 140 DSI 353 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 IN 2 groups x 16 points External Power 20 3
309. p amp amp amp amp E D NC NC NC 132 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 130 00 External Wiring Recommendation 1 The user supplies the current and voltage sources installation and calibration of fuses are at the discretion of the user 2 Use shielded signal cable In noisy environnements twisted shielded cable is recommended 3 Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC s ground 4 A Shield Bar STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010 3020 should be used to connect the shielded cable to ground see Quantum with Unity Pro Hardware Reference Manual 5 All terminals labeled RETURN are common inside the module 6 Not connected NOTE VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the current Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 133 140 ACO 130 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 8 Channel OUT External Power Loop Voltage 6 30 VDC max Bus Current required Module 550 mA Power Dissipation 5 0 W max map 8 output words Error Detection Open circuit in 4 20 mA mode The open channel is indicated through the red channel LED and is also reported back to th
310. pecifications Module Type 16 IN 2 groups x 8 points individually isolated External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 5 5 W max Bus Current required 180 mA map 1 input word Fault Detection None Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 50 Hz ON 175 264 VAC 9 7 mA max OFF 0 40 VAC 60 Hz ON 165 264 VAC 11 5 mA max OFF 0 40 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition 2 6 mA Typical Input Impedance Typical Imput Impedance 50 Hz 31 8 kohms capacitive 60 Hz 26 5 kohms capacitive Isolation Isolation Input to Input 1780 VAC for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute 35010516 05 2010 291 140 DAI 740 00 Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 264 VAC 10s 300 VAC 1 Cycle 400 VAC Response Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes NOTE Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 292 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 740 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Def
311. point or channel is on 35010516 05 2010 565 140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagrams Celenec Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a Celenec certified wiring diagram for this module CENELEC 3 Hazardous Location CERTIFICATION Non Hazardous Location Zone 1 Entity Parameters Group IIA IIB IIC Channel A N ES See Notes 1 amp 2 o 27 lc lo 121 mA ch Made Po 840 mWich LS Field Co 84 nfich Output 1 2 Lo 222 mH ch NIC Output 2 Output 2 7 Chassis Ground Output 3 Output 3 N C N C Note 1 Output 4 Output 4 C Only shielded cables should be used for connections N C Shields should be left open at the field and connected to N C chassis ground atthe module end N C Note 2 N C Pins marked N C are not Output 5 Output 5 electronically connected to the module N C N C Note 3 Output 6 4 Output 6 Compus am connected ogether internally N C N C Output 7 Output 7 N C N C Output 8 Output 8 N C N C N C N C 1 8 Module DIO 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram 566 35010516 05 2010 140 DIO 330 00 CSA Approved Wiring Diagram The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module Notes Related to CSA Certification for this module NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION Not QURE DURUM Entity parameters are provided per
312. pological Addressing The following tables show the topological addresses for the 16 Point Output Modules Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point Object Comment Output 1 9eQ Wo eVr m 1 Value Output 2 eQ WVo eVr m 2 Value Output 15 9eQ Wb eVr m 15 Value Output 16 Qf b e r m 16 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point Object Comment Outputword 1 9eQW W eVr m 1 1 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140DAO84210 140DAO84220 output modules The following figure shows I O map status bytes use 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Group D Error d L Group A Error Group C Error Group B Error There is no I O map status byte associated with the 140DAO84000 140DAO84010 14000084300 or 140DRA84000 module 35010516 05 2010 45 Addressing Modes 32 Point Output Modules The following list shows the 32 point output modules 140DAO85300 AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 Sink 140DDO15310 DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink 140DDO35300 DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source 140DDO35301 DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source 140DDO35310 DC Output 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Sink For addressing information of the 140DVO85300 please refer to Addressing page 464 Flat Addressing The output modules listed above can be configured as either
313. puts Starting 1 Address Outputs Ending 8 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module in AUXO module in other than other than local AUX1 local AUX2 AUX3 Channels Channel1 Range Selection 4 20 mA 0 4095 4 20 mA 0 16000 O 20 mA 0 20000 0 25 mA 0 25000 Timeout State LAST VALUE MINIMUM OUTPUT USER DEFINED Timeout Value 0 0 65535 only enabled Timeout State USER DEFINED Channel2 Channel8 see Channel1 35010516 05 2010 137 140 ACO 130 00 138 35010516 05 2010 140 AVO 020 00 Analog Mixed Voltage OUT Module 11 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AVO 020 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 140 Indicators 141 Wiring Diagram 142 Specifications 145 Addressing 147 Parameter Configuration 148 35010516 05 2010 139 140 AVO 020 00 Presentation Function The Analog Out 4 Channel module accepts outputs voltages in mixed modes and levels These are selected using jumpers on the field wiring connector Illustration The following figure shows the 140 AVO 020 00 module and its components 020 00 2
314. r and apply this product Follow all local and national safety codes and standards Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage User Comments We welcome your comments about this document You can reach us by e mail at techcomm schneider electric com 35010516 05 2010 17 18 35010516 05 2010 General Information Introduction This part provides general information on the discrete and analog I O modules What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 1 Module Configuration 21 Quantum Addressing Modes 25 3 General Rules for Attaching Discrete and Analog Input Output 53 Modules Terminal Blocks 35010516 05 2010 19 General Information 20 35010516 05 2010 Module Configuration Purpose This chapter provides information on software configuration of the module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Mapping Local Quantum I O Station 22 Open the Parameter Configuration 23 35010516 05 2010 21 Module Configuration Mapping a Local Quantum I O Station Overview Use the following dialog to map an existing local Quantum I O station with a new module Inserting a module local This table shows the steps required for inserting a module in a local station Step
315. r Configuration 261 35010516 05 2010 255 140 DAI 453 00 Presentation Function The AC Input 48 VAC 4x8 module accepts 48 VAC inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 453 00 module and its components DAS 6 2 1 o _ GE NEU Y Bo 1 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 256 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 453 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 453 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 453 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 257 140 DAI 453 00 Wiring Diagram Illustrati
316. r contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 304 Indicators 305 Wiring Diagram 306 Specifications 307 Addressing 309 Parameter Configuration 311 35010516 05 2010 303 140 DSI 353 00 Presentation Function The 140 DSI 353 00 module is used with source output devices It accepts 24 VDC inputs It has 32 input points four groups of 8 and has broken wire detection for each unit Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DSI 353 00 module and its components O p 6 27 l Omna NEU Y o eu 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label NOTE Do not use the 140 DSI 353 00 module in a DIO rack containing a 140 CRA 211 x0 module 304 35010516 05 2010 140 DSI 353 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DSI 353 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table sh
317. r input data and one for channel status The data word formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 8 Channel 8 data The following shows the word 9 register Word 9 Input status word 1 Channel 8 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 7 out of range or broken wire __ 1 Channel 6 out of range or broken wire __ 1 Channel 5 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 4 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 3 out of range or broken wire __ 1 Channel 2 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 1 out of range or broken wire 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Range warning on channel 8 1 Range warning on channel 7 1 Range warning on channel 6 1 Range warning on channel 5 1 Range warning on channel 4 1 Range warning on channel 3 1 Range warning on channel 2 1 Range warning on channel 1 A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value An out of range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2 3496 or when a broken wire is sensed on the channel The warning bit is cleared if set when the out of range bit is set 86 35010516 05 2010 140 ARI 030 10 Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 ARI 030 10 Input Module Point Object Comment Input 1 IW b e r m 1 Value 9el No eV r m 1 1 Broken wire or Out of range 9el Vo eVr
318. r out of range Channel 7 open circuit or out of range Channel 8 open circuit or out of range 102 35010516 05 2010 140 ATI 030 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window TC IN 8CH Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING WORD IW 3x INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 9 TASK MAST r MODULE CONFIGURATION RESOLUTION 1 0 Deg M OUTPUT UNIT Centigrade M u COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATOR _ On Board z CHANNELS EF CHANNEL 1 DISABLE Y OPEN CIRCUIT TEST No M RAW OUTPUT AMPLIFIER GAIN 25 v TYPE J GAIN 25 CHANNEL2 CHANNEL3 CHANNEL4 CHANNELS CHANNEL6 CHANNEL7 CHANNEL8 T 1 Local QU 2 140 ATI 35010516 05 2010 103 140 ATI 030 00 Name Default Value Options Description Mapping WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting Address 1 Inputs Ending Address 9 Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module Grayed if module in other AUXO in other than local than local AUX1 AUX2 AUXS Module Configuration Resolution 1 0 Deg 0 1 Deg Output Unit Centigrade Fahrenheit Cold Junction Compensator On Board Channel 1 Channels Channel1 DISABLE ENABLE Open Circuit Test No Yes Raw Output Amplifier Gain 25 100 Typ
319. r up self tests the module is unable to start any communication with the host until the error disappears If the 24V external power supply is not connected to the module an error is detected on the channels and the module will not start Illustration The following figure shows the 140 SDI 953 00S module and its components L 1 140 XTS 002 wiring terminal block Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Field Wiring Terminal Block not provided with the module Removable Door not provided with the module Red Customer Identification Label Fold label provided with the module and place it inside the door arownd NOTE The housing of safety modules is red and a red customer identification label is provided with Quantum Safety I O modules It shall be placed on the terminal block 602 35010516 05 2010 140 SDI 953 00S Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 SDI 953 00S module R Active F 1 9 1 9 2 10 2 10 M M 4 12 4 12 6 19 5 13 6 14 6 14 T e 4 8 16 8 16 Description The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 SDI 953 00S module Type of LED LED Id Color State Meaning System State LED R Green ON Power ON OFF Power OFF Active Green ON The module is communicating with the host OFF The module is not communicating w
320. ram s ix iem eem gn Pere eee enne Qe eed 122 Specifications c oce RR RR REESE 124 Addr ssing lt DRE deque ke ve Ein V 126 Parameter 127 140 ACO 130 00 Analog Mixed Current OUT Module 129 Presentations iie Guten nes 130 Indicators e v Y MUR ee ee 131 Wiring Diagram tm S EQ ERR RES 132 Specifications repr eer ate benc on eae em Rei dre E Ral eda 134 Addressing 5 ood wa eee ae LEER Eee or bent Decet 136 Parameter Configuration 137 35010516 05 2010 Chapter 11 Part IV Chapter 12 Part V Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 140 AVO 020 00 Analog Mixed Voltage OUT Module Presentation Indicators Wiring Diagram Specifications Addressing Parameter Configuration Analog IN OUT Modules 140 AMM 090 00 Analog Mixed Current Voltage IN OUT Module Presentation Indicators Wiring Diagram Specifications Addressing Parameter Configuration Discrete IN General Information Discrete I O Logic 140 DDI 153 10 5 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module
321. re __ 1 Channel 4 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 5 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 6 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 7 out of range or broken wire 1 Channel 8 out of range or broken wire 15 14 13 12 11 109 817 6 5 4 3 12 1110 1 Channel 1 invalid 1 Channel 2 invalid 1 Channel invalid 1 Channel 4 invalid 1 Channel 5 invalid 1 Channel 6 invalid 1 Channel 7 invalid 1 Channel 8 invalid Bit 15 to bit 8 These 8 bits are set to 1 if the input current of the corresponding channel is out its functional limits under 3 75 mA or over 20 25 mA Bit 7 to bit 0 These 8 bits are set to 1 if internal diagnostics detects an invalid channel inside the module Words 10 11 and 12 are used by the module for internal checking e module status reserved for future use e Exchange number serial number of the set of data e Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC function used to detect errors after transmission Health Word The health word is an extra system control generated by the processor module using the data read from the input module Any of these errors activates the health word e invalid channel activates only the corresponding bit of the health word e out of range current on channel activates only the corresponding bit e CRC e incor
322. rect exchange number If an unhealthy input is detected if a bit on word 13 is set to 0 the value of the corresponding channel is set to O word 1 to 8 except in case of out of range the out of range value is not set to zero 598 35010516 05 2010 140 SAI 940 00S The following diagram shows the register of word 13 Word 13 15 11 10 9 8 7 Bit 15 to bit 8 Those bits are not used in word 13 1 Channel 1 OK 1 Channel 2 OK 1 Channel 3 OK 1 Channel 4 OK 1 Channel 5 OK 1 Channel 6 OK 1 Channel 7 OK 1 Channel 8 OK Bit 7 to bit 0 These 8 bits are set to 1 when no error is detected Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 SAI 940 00S Input Module Point Object Comment Input 1 9elWr m 1 Analog value 9elr m 1 1 Invalid channel 9elr m 1 2 Out of range or broken wire 9elr m 1 3 Health bit Input 8 9elIWr m 8 Analog value 9elr m 8 1 Invalid channel 9elr m 8 2 Out of range or broken wire 9elr m 8 3 Health bit Module Status and 96IWr m 9 2 internal use Exchange number CRC LSW 9elWr m 9 3 Less significant word of 32 bit CRC internal use CRC MSW 9elWr m 9 4 Most significant word of 32 bit CRC internal use Health word 9elWr m 9 5 Used abbreviations r rack m module slot 35010516 05 2010
323. reference for a drop should start on a word boundary Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage Map Register Inputs The following figure shows the 1w input word Output 4 Error Output 3 Error Output 2 Error Output 1 Error Input 4 Input 4 Input 2 Input 1 sj 112 3 4 516 78 35010516 05 2010 49 Addressing Modes I O Map Assignment Outputs The following figure shows the Mw output word Fast Trip 4 Enable Fast Trip 3 Enable Fast Trip 2 Enable Fast Trip 1 Enable Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output did 112 3 4 5 16 7 8 In Fast Trip Mode each output can be turned ON by the Command Bit e g Output 1 or by the corresponding Input Bit plus the Fast Trip Enable Bit e g last order Input 1 controls Output 1 directly Topological Addressing The following tables show the topological addressing for the 140 DDM 690 00 Input Output Module Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point 1 0 Object Comment Input 1 l b e r m 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 Value Input 7 l b e r m 7 Value Input 8 lf b e r m 8 Value Output 1 Q b e r m 1 Value Output 2 Q b e r m 2 Value Ou
324. reme OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 13 15 24 240 OUTPUT 16 an T Output protection example see note GROUP B HOT NIC OUTPUT 18 2 27 OUTPUT TT OUTPUT 20 OUTPUT 19 199 69 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 21 69 Q5 OUTPUT 24 G7 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C HOT NIC OUTPUT 26 2 61 OUTPUT 25 OUTPUT 28 6 OUTPUT 27 OUTPUT 30 OUTPUT 29 H 66 65 OUTPUT 32 67 OUTPUT St GROUP D HOT NIC 1 N C Not Connected 2 When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 434 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 853 00 4 CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS e Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common single phase AC power source e Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output Use an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent in parallel with the switch Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE The output protection is composed of an RC filter snubber filter and a varistor e The snubber filter is optional The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the device used e Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage required by the device used 35010516 05 2010 435 140 DAO 85
325. risically Safe 511 Q Quantum Safety I O 586 R remote I O RIO 586 RIO remote I O 586 S status bytes 33 36 42 49 66 77 88 102 114 126 136 147 165 310 465 534 549 560 status words 65 76 86 101 113 126 136 147 163 309 464 532 548 560 597 609 620 T T ANA BI 30 T ANA IN VE 29 T ANA IN VWE 29 T CONT 105 30 terminal blocks installing 53 630 35010516 05 2010
326. rmats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 8 Channel 8 data The following shows the word 9 register Word 9 Input status word 1 Channel 8 out of range 1 Channel 7 out of range 1 Channel 6 out of range __ 17 Channel 5 out of range 1 Channel 4 out of range 1 Channel out of range __ 1 Channel 2 out of range 1 Channel 1 out of range 3 14 5 6 7 8 9 110 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Range warning on channel 8 1 Range warning on channel 7 1 Range warning on channel 6 1 Range warning on channel 5 1 Range warning on channel 4 1 Range warning on channel 3 1 Range warning on channel 2 1 Range warning on channel 1 The following figure shows the word 10 register Word 10 Internal temperature Arange warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value An out of range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2 4 or when a broken wire is sensed on the channel The warning bit is cleared if set when the out of range bit is set 35010516 05 2010 101 140 ATI 030 00 Topological Addressing Topological
327. rminal strip includes the removable door and label oa hWnd 120 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 020 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ACO 020 00 module Active 1 1 2 2 3 8 4 4 Description The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ACO 020 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 4 Green Module outputs switched ON 1 4 Red Broken wire on indicated channels NOTE When the green channel status LEDs are OFF the loop current is 0 mA Diagnostic 1 At power up the channel outputs are all disabled current 0 Configuring any channel as disabled will cause all channels to be disabled when a communication loss occurs 35010516 05 2010 121 140 ACO 020 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Before removing the connector remove the field power or ensure that the pre actuator wiring can remain in an open circuit condition Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 ACO 020 00 module MONITOR 1 4 N C Nc NIC Nc SOURCE 10 SINK 1 4 FIELD SOURCE 2
328. rrent source input current sink output Current Sinking This describes a physical implementation of the I O hardware which when in the true state sinks current from the external load Current Sourcing This describes a physical implementation of the I O hardware which when in the true state sources current to the external load 172 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 153 10 5 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module 1 4 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 153 10 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 174 Indicators 175 Wiring Diagram 176 Specifications 177 Parameter Configuration 179 35010516 05 2010 173 140 DDI 153 10 Presentation Function The DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source module accepts 5 VDC inputs It is for use with shared input common wired to 0 V and is compatible with TTL LS S and CMOS logic Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDI 153 10 module and its components 2 mem 6 2 o IR Omn NEU Bo N 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification L
329. s and one for the remote cold junction temperature The data words formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 8 Channel 8 data The following shows the word 9 register Word 9 Input status word r 1 Broken Wire or out of range on Channel 8 __ 1 Broken Wire or out of range on Channel 7 __ 1 Broken Wire or out of range on Channel 6 __ 1 Broken Wire or out of range on Channel 5 1 Broken Wire or out of range on Channel 4 __ 1 Broken Wire or out of range on Channel __ 1 Broken Wire or out of range on Channel 2 __ 1 Broken Wire or out of range on Channel 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Range warning on channel 8 1 Range warning on channel 7 1 Range warning on channel 6 1 Range warning on channel 5 1 Range warning on channel 4 1 Range warning on channel 3 1 Range warning on channel 2 1 Range warning on channel 1 The following figure shows the word 10 register Word 10 Remote cold junction temperature 532 35010516 05 2010 140 AII 330 00 Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 All 330 00 Input Module IODDT Point Object Comment Input 1 9eIW Wo eVr m 1 Value 9el No eVr m 1 1 Out of range 9el Vo eV r m 1 2 Range warning Input 8 9elIW W o eVr m 8 Value 9el Vo eV r m 8 1 Out of range l b e r m 8 2 Range warning Status Word 9elW Wo eVr m 9 Status of input channels C
330. s one of the PELV type with a maximum output voltage of 60 V 2 over and under voltage supervisors that is 1 for each micro processor system in the same way as they monitor the DC to DC converters In case of a fault the supervisors signal this condition to the user logic by setting a status bit in order to warn the system of possible inconsistent inputs 4 DANGER LOSS OF THE ABILITY TO PERFORM SAFETY FUNCTIONS Use the correct process power supply which is a PELV type with a maximum output of 60 V Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 588 35010516 05 2010 140 SAI 940 00S Analog IN Module 58 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 SAI 940 00S module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 590 Indicators 592 Wiring Diagram 593 Specifications 595 Addressing 597 Parameter Configuration 600 35010516 05 2010 589 140 SAI 940 00S Presentation Function 140 SAI 940 00S is a 16 bits 4 20 mA 8 channel current analog input module NOTE If an error is detected during power up self tests the module is unable to start any communication with the host until the error disappears Illustration The following figure shows the 140 SAI 940 00S module and its components
331. s 0 mA Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Table The following table shows the voltmeter monitor specifications Range 1 5 V Main current loop must be active Scaling Vout Volts f MA x 0 25 Output Impedance 300 ohms Typical Wiring Length 1 m max 35010516 05 2010 125 140 ACO 020 00 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires four contiguous 16 bit words Mw for output data The data words formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 4 Channel 4 data Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 ACO 020 00 Output Module Point Object Comment Output 1 9eQW w eVr m 1 Value Output 2 9eQW W eVr m 2 Value Output 3 QW b e r m 3 Value Output 4 9eQW w eVr m 4 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 ACO 020 00 Output Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 16 5 4 13 211 Channel 1 loop broken wire Channel 2 loop broken wire Channel 3 loop broken wiree L Channel 4 loop broken wire 126 35010516 05 2010 140 ACO 020 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window
332. s for the 140 SAI 940 00S module Type of LED Id Color State Meaning LED System R Green ON Power ON as OFF Power OFF Active Green ON The module is communicating with the host OFF The module is not communicating with the host F Red ON An internal diagnostic error is detected OFF No internal diagnostic error is detected Channel 1 8 Green ON The input current on the channel is in the 3 75 20 25 mA range MED OFF The input current on the channel is out of the 3 75 20 25 mA range Red ON The channel is not operational OFF The channel is operational NOTE The 140 SAI 940 00S module has only 8 channels LEDs 9 to 16 are never lit 592 35010516 05 2010 140 SAI 940 00S Wiring Diagram Precautions Grounding Connect each end of the cable shields as follows e on the sensors side connect to the shield continuation terminals ground terminals e on the module side clamp the shielding to the ground using grounding equipment STB XSP 3000 grounding kit see page 591 and grounding clips STB XSP 3010 or STB XSP 3020 Field wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires 35010516 05 2010 593 140 SAI 940 00S Illustration The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 SAI 940 00S module MODULE N C No Connection internal input impedance 287 ohms Rmin of the passive device 913 ohms Rmax of the passive device 7713 ohms
333. s with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of V4 and Isq for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imhx for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of C and L for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than C and L for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus all cable parameters Ca S Ci Coaple La S Li Leane Voc Vmax lse Imax Note 7 Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate d store more than 1 2V 20uJ or 25 mW For example switches thermocouplers LEDs RTDs etc Note 8 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Cope NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP12 6 Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations Instrumentation Pajt I Intrinsic Safety Nate 9 Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms Nofe 10 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA 82 01 Note 11 No revisions to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval Note 12 For Schneider Electric internal use only For control sheet refer to 19 100986 Rev 1 Note 13 For Division 2 installation the apparatus shall be installed in compliance with the enclosure mounting spacing and segregation requirements of the ultimate application including access only by the use
334. sing Discrete I O Bit Module Status Configuration for Discrete Input Modules Configuration for Discrete Output Configuration for Discrete Input Output Modules General Rules for Attaching Discrete and Analog Input Output Modules Terminal Blocks Attaching a Discrete and Analog Modules Terminal Blocks Analog IN 140 ACI 030 00 Analog Current Voltage IN Module Presentation coegi e Re EE EAR ep ers ry ides or Indicators ecc sea Se ee c enu PIN eto Wiring DIagram cose DE nig eR RE SY Rr Reb ip ek ee Specifications e Re IARE REY Re Ee Addressing fet ec Receta DR Rr ele i ee ee tots Parameter 35010516 05 2010 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Part Ill Chapter 9 Chapter 10 140 ACI 040 00 Analog Mixed Current IN Module 69 Presentations meters tese buen i dec ME RIS RUP dn 70 Indicators aie il Asp REID IEEE EM ER UBI 71 Wiring Diagram x scm best RR ae Ru rA xus 72 Specifications ese EET ee he ee e 74 Addressing annie acute ppp eee Gh acid Bop ENE Selamat ee
335. sing Flat Addressing This module requires 32 contiguous output references 5M or 2 contiguous output words for output data and 32 contiguous input references 1 or 2 contiguous input words for verification input data For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 Output Words MSB First Word Output 1 2 5 7 12 14 15 16 Point 1 MSB Second Word 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Output Point 17 Input Words MSB First Word Input Sense 2 5 11 12 13 14 t5 t6 Point 1 MSB Second Word Input Sense kon 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 34 32 Topological Addressing Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format Point Object Comment Input 1 9el No eV r m 1 Value Input 2 l b e r m 2 Value Input 31 9el Vo eV r m 31 Value Input 32 9el No eV r m 32 Value Output 1 Q b e r m 1 Value Output 2 Q b e r m 2 Value Output 31 9eQ Wb eV r m 31 Value Output 32 9eQ WVo eVr m 32 Value 464 35010516 05 2010 140 DVO 853 00 I O Map Status Byte Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point V O Object
336. sipation 2 2W map 9 input words Error Detection Broken wire in 4 20 mA mode Out of range Operating Ranges Bipolar 10 VDC 5 VDC 20 mA Unipolar o VDC 5 VDC 20 mA oo Unipolar with Offset 5 VDC 4 20mA NOTE The Operating Ranges are selectable on a per channel base Voltage Input Absolute Voltage max 50 VDC Linear Mesuring Range Input range x 1 024 Input Impedance gt 20 Mohms 110 35010516 05 2010 140 AVI 030 00 Current Input Current Input Absolute Current max 25 mA Linear Measuring Range Input range x 1 024 Input Impedance 250 ohms 0 01 Resolution Conversion Isolation Resolution Conversion 16 bit 10 VDC 0 10 VDC 15 bit 5 VDC 0 5 VDC 20 mA 0 20 mA 14 bit 1 5 VDC 4 20 mA Accuracy Error 25 degrees C Voltage Mode Typical 0 03 of full scale 10V 0 10V Maximum 0 05 of full scale 10V 0 10V Current Mode Add an extra 0 03 Accuracy Drift with Temperature Typical 0 0015 of full scale degrees C Maximum 0 004 of full scale degrees C Linearity 0 008 Common Mode Rejection gt 80 dB 60 Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3 dB 847 Hz 20 Update Time 10 ms for all channels
337. ssor module are mapped Except for the health word the data described here are transferred to and from the 140 SDO 953 00S module using the Quantum global backplane communication access mechanism which is common to all Quantum modules NOTE The words input and output used here are defined with respect to the processor module 11 words are necessary for this module e 4 words dedicated to output data e 1 dedicated to channel values e 3 words used by the module exchange number CRC e 6 words dedicated to inputs data e 1 dedicated to energized de energized channel detection e 1 dedicated to overload errors e 1 dedicated to unsafe channel errors e 1 dedicated to process power supply status malfunction from the host and exchange number which is used by the module e 2 words used by the module CRC e 1 health word this word is accessible by the processor module only 620 35010516 05 2010 140 SDO 953 00S Flat Addressing Output words The following diagram shows the register of the first output word On bit 15 you read the output value of channel 1 on bit 14 you read the output value of channel 2 and so on Word 1 __ 1 Output value on channel 1 __ 1 Output value on channel 2 1 Output value on channel 3 __ 1 Output value on channel 4 1 Output value on channel 5 __ 1 Output value on channel 6 __ 1 Output value on channel 7 1 Output value on channel 8
338. ssor module is detected Time Out State Channel 1 HOLD LAST VALUE USER DEFINED Position in case of time out Channel 16 HOLD LAST VALUE USER DEFINED Position in case of time out 628 35010516 05 2010 Index 0 9 140 103000 57 140 104000 69 140ACO02000 119 140ACO13000 129 140 1133000 517 140 1133010 539 140 1033000 551 140AMMO09000 153 140ARI03010 79 140ATI03000 91 140AVIOS3000 105 140AVO02000 139 140DAI34000 231 140DAI35300 239 140DAI44000 247 140DAI45300 255 140DAI54000 263 140DAI54300 271 140DAI55300 279 140DAI74000 287 140DAI75300 295 140DAM59000 497 140DAO84000 389 140DAO84010 399 140DAO84210 409 140DAO84220 421 140DAO85300 431 14000115310 173 140DDI35300 181 140DDI35310 189 140DDI36400 197 14000167300 207 14000184100 215 14000185300 223 1400039000 473 140DDM69000 485 140DDO15310 317 140DDO35300 327 140DDO35301 337 140DDO35310 347 140DDO36400 357 140DDO84300 367 140DDO88500 377 14001133000 573 14001033000 563 140DRA84000 441 140DRC83000 449 14005135300 303 14007085300 457 1405 1940005 589 140501953005 601 140500953005 613 A addressing 25 flat 26 IODDT 28 35010516 05 2010 629 Index C channel data structure for analog modules T ANA BI VWE 28 30 T ANA IN VE 28 29 T ANA IN VWE 28 29 T CNT 105 28 configuring discrete I O modules 21 Int
339. stance Module Specifications Specifications for the Quantum140 All 330 00 module configured as an Intrinsically Safe RTD Resistance input module are as follows Number of Channels 8 IN RTD Types Configurable Platinum American and European PT100 PT200 PT500 PT1000 200 C to 850 C Nickel N100 N200 N500 N1000 60 C to 180 C Measurement Current PT100 PT200 N100 N200 2 5 mA 0 5 mA PT500 PT1000 N500 N1000 Input Impedance gt 10M ohms Linearity 0 003 of full scale 0 60 C Resolution 12 bits plus sign 0 1 C Absolute Accuracy 0 5 C 25 C 0 9 C 0 60 C Accuracy Error 25 C Typical 0 05 of full scale Maximum 0 1 of full scale Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus gt 100 dB 50 60 Hz Input Filter 1780 VAC 47 63 Hz or 2500 VDC for 1 min Update Time All Channels 3 wire 2 1 35 sec or 4 wire 750 m sec Bus Current Required 400 mA Power Dissipation 2W External Power Not required for this module Fault Detection Out of range or broken wire conditions Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible 35010516 05 2010 529 140 AII 330 00 Thermocouple Millivolt Module Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Thermocouple Mill
340. stor Limited ON State Current ON State Current 12 VDC 5 10 mA Q 24 VDC 6 30 mA 48 VDC 2 15 mA 60 VDC 1 5 Response Switching Frequency Response Switching Frequency OFF ON 4 ms ON OFF 4ms Switching Frequency lt 100 Hz 220 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 841 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window DC IN 10 60V 8x2 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING l 1X vi INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 BINARY M TASK MAST Y Q 1 Local Qj 2 140 DDI Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 16 1 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 221 140 DDI 841 00 222 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 853 00 10 60 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module 20 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 853 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 224 Indicators 225 Wiring Diagram 226 Specifications 227 Parameter Configuration 229
341. t be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label oahwWhd 232 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 340 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 340 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 340 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 233 140 DAI 340 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 340 00 wiring diagram RETURN 1 A T INPUT 1 L N RETURN 2 INPUT 2 RETURN 3 INPUT 3 RETURN 4 G INPUT 4 eO RETURN 5 INPUT 5 RETURN 6 D INPUT 6 RETURN 7 INPUT 7 RETURN 8 INPUT 8 e RETURN 9 INPUT 9 RETURN 10 7 2 INPUT 10 RETURN 11 G9 INPUT 11 RETURN 12 7 7 INPUT 12 NIC NIC RETURN 13 5 T INPUT 13 RETURN 14 Ga 53 INPUT 14 RETURN 15 e 55 INPUT 15 RETURN 16 INPUT 16 Nic NIC NOTE This module is not polarity sensitive Not Connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 234 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 340 00
342. t exceeds the rated input value by 2 4 or when a broken wire 4 20 mA or 1 5 V mode is sensed on the channel Out of range bits are also set if inputs drop below 0 5 V 1 5 V mode or 2 08 mA 4 20 mA mode 35010516 05 2010 113 140 AVI 030 00 Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 AVI 030 00 Input Module Point 1 0 Object Comment Input 1 9elIW Wo eVr m 1 Value 9el Vo eVr m 1 1 Out of range 9el Vo eV r m 1 2 Range warning Input 8 9elW Wo eVr m 8 Value l b e r m 8 1 Out of range l b e r m 8 2 Range warning Status Word 9elW Wo eVr m 9 Status of input channels Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot IODDT The 140AVI03000 Input Module uses the T ANA IN VWE IODDT IODDT Name Object Data Type Name T ANA IN VWE CHf b e r m c ANA IN VWE userdefined Wr m c 0 Int VALUE 9elr m c 1 Bool ERROR 9elr m c 2 Bool WARNING Used abbreviations r rack m module slot c channel b bus e equipment drop Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off NOTE In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for l and Q I O Map Status Byte The I O map status byte is used by the 140 AVI 030 00 Input Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 3 12 1 _ 1 Br
343. t required Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible 35010516 05 2010 547 140 AII 330 10 Addressing Flat Addressing This module requires nine contiguous 16 bit input words 1w eight for input data and one for channel status The data words formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 8 Channel 8 data The following shows the word 9 register 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 La 7 Broken wire or Out of range on channel 1 1 Broken wire or Out of range on channel 2 1 Broken wire or Out of range on channel 3 1 Broken wire or Out of range on channel 4 1 Broken wire or Out of range on channel 5 1 Broken wire or Out of range on channel 6 1 Broken wire or Out of range on channel 7 1 Broken wire or Out of range on channel 8 NOTE The word 9 register is the status of input channels This status works for all configurations beginning PV04 and for any version PV with configuration 4 20 mA But the status doesn t work for PV lt 04 with configurations 0 20 mA or 0 25 mA Topological Addressing Topological addresses for the 140 All 030 10 Input Module Point VO Object Comment Input 1 9e6IW W eWVr m 1 Value 9el Vo eV r m 1 1 Broken wire or Out of range
344. tation 338 Indicators 339 Wiring Diagram 340 Specifications 342 Maintenance 344 140 DDO 353 01 Parameter Configuration 345 35010516 05 2010 337 140 DDO 353 01 Presentation Function The 140 DDO 353 01 source module switches 24 VDC powered loads and is short circuit and overload resistant Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 01 module and its components 2 6 2 o AS IR Omn p NEU o N 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 338 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 01 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 353 01 module Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 353 01 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red An error external to the module has been detected 1 32 Green The
345. ted NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 242 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 353 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 32 IN 4 groups x 8 points External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 10 9 W max Bus Current required 250 mA map 2 input words Fault Detection None Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 50 Hz ON 14 30 VAC 11 1 mA max OFF 0 5 VAC 60 Hz ON 12 30 VAC 13 2 mA max OFF 0 5 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition 1 9 mA Typical Input Impedance Typical Imput Impedance 50 Hz 3 1 kohms capacitive 60 Hz 2 6 kohms capacitive Isolation Isolation Group to Group 1780 VAC for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute 35010516 05 2010 243 140 DAI 353 00 Fuses Fuses Internal None External User installed per local and national electrical codes Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 30 VAC 10s 32 VAC 1 Cycle 50 VAC Response Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF M
346. ternal varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent in parallel with the switch Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE The output protection is composed of an RC filter snubber filter and a varistor e The snubber filter is optional The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the device used e Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage required by the device used 35010516 05 2010 393 140 DAO 840 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 OUT isolated External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 1 85 W 1 1 x Total module load Currents Bus Current required Module 350 mA map 1 output words Absolute Maximum Input Absolute Maximum Input 10s 300 VAC 1 Cycle 400 VAC Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 20 253 VAC ON State Drop Point 1 5 VAC Maximum Load Current Maximum Load Current Each Point 24 to 115 VAC 4 Amps per output 200 to 230 VAC 3 Amps per output Any four contiguous Points 4 0 A max continuous for the sum of the four points Per Module 16 A continuous see chart below 394 35010516 05 2010 140 DAO 840 00 The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 00 operating curve 18
347. th concept parameters listed below The entity parameters listed are per channel HAZARDOUS LOCATION Class I Div 2 Group A C D N C Output 2 4 Output 5 4 Monitor 8 Monitor 1 Output 1 Monitor 2 Chassis Ground Monitor 3 Output 3 4 Monitor 4 Output 4 N C N C N C Monitor 5 Monitor 6 Output 6 4 Monitor 7 Output 7 Output 8 15 Module Terminal Strip 140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram 31001364 Rev 01 HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS I DIV I GROUP A B D CLASS II DIV I GROUP E F G CLASS III DIV I LS Field Device R 500 OHMS Ma Ndte 1 Only shielded cables should be usedfor connections Shields shoulc be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the end Ndte 2 Pins marked are not electronically connected to the module Note 3 Use only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes to mount this module 4 More than one device can be connected in serieS as long as they have differential input and total load resistance is less th n 500 ohms Note 5 Voltmeter is an optional Voltmeter shown to read voltage proportional to the current Wiring to this terminal is limited to meter Urlused channels will show Open Loop unless shorted as Shown in Channel 8 Nate 6 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe arau
348. that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 4 CAUTION OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 2 A 250V fast acting fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage 370 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 843 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 OUT 2 groups x 8 points Logic True High External Power 10 60 VDC Power Dissipation 1 0 W 1 V x Total module load Current Bus Current required Module 160 mA max map 1 output word Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 10 2 72 VDC Absolute Maximum Voltage 72 VDC continuous ON State Drop Point 1VDC 92A Maximum Load Current Surge Current Maximum Load Current Surge Current Each Point 2A Each Group 6A Per Module 12A Surge Current max 7 5 A Q 50 ms duration no more than 20 per minute each point OFF State Leakage Point 1mA 60 VDC 35010516 05 2010 371 140 DDO 843 00 Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Group to Group 700 VDC for 1 minute Group to Bus 2500 VDC for 1 minute Output Protection internal Over voltage suppression diode Response Resistive Loads Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1ms ON OFF 1ms 372 35010516 05 201
349. this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 564 Indicators 565 Wiring Diagrams 566 Specification 571 140 DIO 330 00 Parameter Configuration 572 35010516 05 2010 563 140 DIO 330 00 Presentation Function The Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Output module provides intrinsically safe power to a variety of components such as solenoid valves LEDs etc located in a hazardous area This module is for use with sink devices only Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DIO 330 00 module and its components O ES 6 27 IR Omna NEU Y o eu 1 Model Number Module Description Color Code 2 LED Display 3 Fuse Cutouts 4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip 5 Removable Door 6 Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door 564 35010516 05 2010 140 DIO 330 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DIO 330 00 module Active 1 2 3 4 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DIO 330 00 module LEDs Color Indication When On Active Green Bus communication is present 1 8 Green The indicated
350. tic 1 When using 2 wire configurations the temperature equivalent of twice the lead resistance of one leg must be subtracted from the temperature reading 35010516 05 2010 81 140 ARI 030 10 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the 140 ARI 030 10 A 4 WIRE RTD SOURCE 1 V SENSE 1 1 SOURCE 2 V SENSE 2 SHIELD 1 SOURCE 3 V SENSE 3 SOURCE 4 V SENSE 4 SHIELD 3 1 SOURCE 5 V SENSE 5 1 SOURCE 6 V SENSE 6 SHIELD 5 1 SOURCE 7 Lon 3 WIRE RTD V SENSE 7 f SOURCE 8 V SENSE 8 SHIELD 7 2 WIRE RTD 82 35010516 05 2010 140 ARI 030 10 External Wiring Recommendation 1 The module is calibrated per IEC Publication 751 for platinum RTDs 1000 0 degrees C TCR a 0 003859 Q degrees C DIN 43760 for nickel RTDs American Platinum RTDs 1000 0 degrees C TCR 0 003920 Q degrees C 2 Terminals labeled shield are not connected internally Shields should be grounded at the field device end NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG 35010516 05 2010 83 140 ARI 030 10 140 ARI 030 10 Specifications General Specifications RTD Types Range Module Type 8 Channel IN RTD
351. to Bus 2500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Group 1200 VAC rms for 1 minute Output Protection internal Group varistor and individual point over Current sense 35010516 05 2010 383 140 DDO 885 00 Response Resistive Loads Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1ms ON OFF 1 ms NOTE Each output point is protected by an over current sense circuit When an over current condition is detected the point is turned OFF its LED fault indicator is turned ON and the appropriate bit is set in the module fault register The output point will be turned OFF after a short is detected A fault greater than 9 4 A will guarantee that the point will be turned OFF and will latch the output point in the OFF state To clear a fault the point must be commanded OFF in user logic 384 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 885 00 Maintenance Fuses Fuses Internal 4 A 250 V See figure below for the location of the fuses External Not required for this module A CAUTION DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS Protect each point with a 4 A 250 V fuse Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before accessing the fuses e Remove the power to the module pre actuators and e disconnect the terminal block e Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and loa
352. ton 35010516 05 2010 359 140 DDO 364 00 Recommended Cables The following table shows recommended cables description and their length in meters Cable Part Number Description Length M TSXCDP301 1 HE 10 flying leads 3 TSXCDP501 1 HE 10 flying leads 5 TSXCDP053 2 HE 10 round cable 0 5 TSXCDP103 2 HE 10 round cable 1 TSXCDP203 2 HE 10 round cable 2 TSXCDP303 2 HE 10 round cable 3 TSXCDP503 2 HE 10 round cable 5 Compatible Output Adapter Sub Bases The following tables shows the compatible output adapter sub bases Channels Type 8 ABE 7S08S2xx 8 ABE 7R08Sxxx 7P08T330 16 ABE 7R16Sxxx 16 ABE 7R16Txxx 7P16Txxx With the splitter sub base ABE 7ACCO2 360 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 364 00 Indicators Illustration The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 364 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 32 464 Act F 17 25 18 26 19 27 20 28 21 29 22 30 23 31 24 32 Descriptions The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 364 00 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Act Green Bus communication is present F Red Group power missing short circuit or overload 32 Green Points 33 to 64 displayed on LED matrix 64 Green Points 65 to 96 displayed on LED matrix Pushbutton Us
353. tput 14 pre act output 15 36 85 output 15 pre act output 16 87 output 16 eai 24V process supply MODULE power supply 24 VDC fuse 10 A max determined by the module load current fast blow pre act pre actuator NOTE There is only one group of 16 outputs All common 24 V are internally connected and all common OV are also internally connected For safety applications itis recommended to connect at least 2 ground lines common OV to the field wiring terminal block The two pins of a same input e g pin 1 and 2 for input 1 are internally connected too so that you can use either the right pin or the left one 35010516 05 2010 617 140 SDO 953 00S Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 OUT 1 group x 16 channels Logic True High Pre actuator Power Supply 24 VDC Power Dissipation 1 9 W 0 65 V x I Bus Current required Module 350 mA map 4 output words and 7 input words Fault Detection overload 24V process supply problem system inoperable Update Time 15 ms for all channels Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 19 2 30 VDC Absolute Voltage max 34 VDC ON State Drop Point 0 3 VDC 0 5A Maximum Load Current Surge Current Maximum Load Current Surge Current Each Point 0 65 A Per Module 10 4 Surge Current max
354. tput 7 9eQ WVo eVr m 7 Value Output 8 eQ WVo eVr m 8 Value Topological addresses in Word Mapping format Point V O Object Comment Inputword 1 9elIW W5b eVr m 1 1 Value Outputword 1 9eQW W eVr m 1 1 Value Used abbreviations b bus e equipment drop r rack m module slot 50 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Map Status Byte Outputs The four least significant bits in the I O map status are used as follows 8171651413211 Output 1 Error Output 2 Error Output 3 Error Output 4 Error 16 Point Input 8 Point Output Modules The following information pertains to the 140 DAM 590 00 AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 and the 140 DDM 390 00 DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 modules e 140 DAM 590 00 AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 e 140 DDM 390 00 DC Input 24 Vdc 2X8 DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Flat Addressing The modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous 1 references or as one IW word and as MW word Map Register Inputs The following figure shows the 1w input word For a description of how to access the input points please refer to Discrete I O Bit Numbering page 32 MSB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Map Assignment Outputs The modules listed above can be configured as 8 M r
355. up must be from the same phase of line input voltage This module is not polarity sensitive Not Connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Ensure that all inputs in a group are from the same phase of line input voltage Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 274 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 543 00 Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Module Type 16 IN 2 groups x 8 points External Power Not required for this module Power Dissipation 5 5 W max Bus Current required 180 mA map 1 input word Fault Detection None Operating Voltage and Input Current Operating Voltage and Input Current 50 Hz ON 85 132 VAC 11 1 mA max OFF 0 20 VAC 60 Hz ON 79 132 VAC 13 2 mA max OFF 0 20 VAC Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 2 1 from an External Device to be recognized as an OFF Condition Typical Input Impedance Typical Imput Impedance 50 Hz 14 4 kohms capacitive 60 Hz 12 kohms capacitive Isolation Isolation Group to Group 1780 VAC for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute 35010516 05 2010 275 140 DAI 543 00 Absolute Maximum Input
356. uration Parameter Configuration Window DC IN OUT 24V 16x8 F Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT I 1x M OX v INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 8 TASK MAST INPUT TYPE BINARY BINARY USER DEFINED VALUE TIMEOUT STATE 0 T1 Local QU 2 140 DDM Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x M 0x WORD IW 3x MW 4X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 16 1 Address Outputs Starting 1 1 Address Outputs Ending 8 1 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if AUXO module in other than module in other AUX1 local than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 483 140 DDM 390 00 Name Default Value Options Description Input Type BINARY BCD Output Type BINARY BCD Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State USER DEFINED 484 35010516 05 2010 140 DDM 690 00 125 VDC High Power IN OUT Module 49 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDM 690 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Prese
357. urce OUT Module 431 44 140 DRA 840 00 Relay 16x1 Normally Open OUT Module 441 45 140 DRC 830 00 Relay 8x1 Normally Open Normally Closed 449 OUT Module 46 140 DVO 853 00 10 30 VDC 32x1 Verified OUT Module 457 35010516 05 2010 313 Discrete OUT Modules 314 35010516 05 2010 General Information 31 Discrete I O Logic Circuits Discrete I O True High Figure The following figure shows true high current sink input current source output schematic Power Current Supply gt _ gt _ Power L Input Lr G 4 Output YW v C Common Load Current s J 35010516 05 2010 315 General Information Discrete I O True Low Figure The following figure shows true low current source input current sink output schematic Power Supply T Input e 8 Current OUO QT Current Sinking Power Current Supply Load Output Common This describes a physical implementation of the I O hardware which when in the true state sinks current from the external load Current Sourcing This describes a physical implementation of the I O hardware which when in the true state sources current to the external load 316 35010516 05 2010
358. urrent required 6 points ON 375 mA 12 points ON 650 mA map 1 input word 1 output word Fault Detection Over Current see note below Voltage Voltage Operating Voltage max 19 2 156 2 VDC including ripple ON State Drop Point 0 75 VDC 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Surge Current Maximum Load Current Surge Current Each Point 0 75 A 40 degrees C see the operating curve Each Group 3A 0 60 degrees C Per Module 6 A 0 60 degrees C Surge Current max 4 A Q1 ms duration no more than 6 per minute Peak Load Current 4A for T lt 1 ms OFF State Leakage Point 0 5 mA 150 VDC 382 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 885 00 The following figure shows the 140DD088500 derating amp chart e E o075 2 o 0 625 M 2 0 5 2 n 2 o Ns 85 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C NOTE Each group 3 A 0 60 degrees C Per module 6 A 0 60 degrees C Maximum Tungsten Maximum Tungsten 130 VDC 46 W per point 115 VDC 41 W per point 24 VDC 8 W per point Inductance and Switching Frequency Inductance and Switching Frequency Inductance Internal Diode protected no limit on Inductance Switching Frequency 50 Hz max Isolation Protection Isolation Protection Field
359. us 30 VDC 1 0 ms 50 VDC 35010516 05 2010 203 140 DDI 364 00 Response Response OFF ON 2 0 ms max ON OFF 3 0 ms max Fuses Fuses Internal External User installed per local and national electrical codes 204 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 364 00 Parameter Configuration Parameter and Default values Parameter Configuration Window DC Input 24v DC 6x16 Sink Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT I 1X M INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 96 ASK MAST M 1 Local QJ 2 140001 Name Default Value Options Description Mapping l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 96 6 Address Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUXO module in other in other than local AUX1 than local AUX2 AUX3 35010516 05 2010 205 140 DDI 364 00 206 35010516 05 2010 140 DDI 673 00 125 VDC 3x8 Sink IN Module 1 8 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 673 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 208 Indicators 209 Wiring Diagram 210 Specifications 211 Parameter Configuration 214 35010516 05 2010 207 140 DDI 673 00
360. us table set to 100 4 Quantum Drop for local Quantum Drop for local B Overview B Config Parameter Name Value Starting address status table 100 Ending address status 113 Drop hold up time 100ms 3 In Bytes 76 NN TT Local Quan 1 4 140 A 80 Data Editor fbtest M Quantum D o 35010516 05 2010 33 Addressing Modes The following illustration shows how one word of the table conveys the status information for two modules 2 3 4 5 6 yo yo yo Module Module Module A B Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 4 Slot 3 VO Status B O Status A 96IVV101 Slot 6 Slot 5 VO Status C 96IW102 8 7 e s 4 s 2 1 8 7 e s 4 2 1 VO Status Bits VO Status Bits Example The following example shows a rack and the corresponding I O status bytes displayed in an animation table The drop is configured to start at word 1W100 and allocates 16 words This represents the local and expansion rack and assumes they are 16 slot racks If a module does not have have a status byte associated with the module or the slot is empty then the byte 0 34 35010516 05 2010 Addressing Modes Rack configuration and Animation table Table Modifica Y 4 ER IW100 0 0 ARRAY O 1 Int Comment IW100 7 2 1000_0000_000
361. ustomer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door NOTE The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140 XTS 002 00 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label 368 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 843 00 Indicators Illustration Descriptions The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 843 00 module 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fa 8 Active 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 oak OWN The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 84300 module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 35010516 05 2010 369 140 DDO 843 00 Wiring Diagram Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DDO 843 00 wiring diagram 2A NIC 2 QD A LAM Ie r NIC 4 OUTPUT 2 NC 8 OUTPUT 3 A M ME G OUTPUT 4 N C 9 GROUP A SUPPLY N C 42 OUTPUT 5 N C 13 OUTPUT 6 Me OUTPUT 7 N C OUTPUT 8 ME GROUP A COMMON NIC G2 Gn OUTPUT 9 N C G3 OUTPUT 10 NIC 5 OUTPUT 11 GT OUTPUT 12 G9 GROUP B SUPPLY NIC 22 6n OUTPUT 13 N C 93 OUTPUT 14 NIC 5 OUTPUT 15 NIC OUTPUT 16 Nie GROUP B COMMON NOTE N C Not Connected NOTE When field wiring the I O module the maximum wire size
362. w AC IN 115V 16x1 5 Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT l 1X Y INPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 INPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 16 Nig P BINARY TASK MAST X M 1 Local QJ 2 140 DAIJ Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT l 1x WORD IW 3X Inputs Starting 1 1 Address Inputs Ending 16 1 Address Input Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if Grayed if module AUX1 module in other in other than local AUX2 than local AUX3 35010516 05 2010 269 140 DAI 540 00 270 35010516 05 2010 140 DAI 543 00 115 VAC 2x8 IN Module 26 About this Chapter The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 543 00 module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation 272 Indicators 273 Wiring Diagram 274 Specifications 275 Parameter Configuration 277 35010516 05 2010 271 140 DAI 543 00 Presentation Function The AC Input 115 VAC 2x8 module accepts 115 VAC inputs Illustration The following figure shows the 140 DAI 543 00 module and its components Duss 6 2 1 o _ GE NEU Y
363. wer is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 35010516 05 2010 353 140 DDO 353 10 Fuses Location Figure The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the 140 DDO 353 10 module MI DDO 353 10 Points 17 24 Points 25 32 Fuse Locations 354 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 353 10 140 DDO 353 10 Parameter Configuration Parameter Configuration Window 24 VDC OUT TRUE LOW m Config Parameter Name Value MAPPING BIT M OX z OUTPUTS STARTING ADDRESS 1 OUTPUTS ENDING ADDRESS 32 TASK MAST M BINARY y TIMEOUT STATE USER DEFINED VALUE 1 0 VALUE 2 0 ut Local Qy 2 140 DDG Parameter and Default Values Name Default Value Options Description Mapping BIT M Ox WORD MW 4X Output Starting 1 1 Address Output Ending 32 2 Address Output Type BINARY BCD Task MAST FAST fixed to Mast if module Grayed if module AUXO in other than local in other than local AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE Value 1 Value 2 0 0 65535 only enabled if Timeout State Userdefined 35010516 05 2010 355 140 DDO 353 10 356 35010516 05 2010 140 DDO 364 00 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast OUT Module 3 6 About this Chapter The following chapter provides in
364. y parameters are per Channel Voc 15 5 VDC Isc 276 mA Ch 500 nf Ch La 20 3 mH Ch Po 1070 mW Ch HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION Class I Div 2 Group A B C D Class Div Group A B C D Class Il Div Group E F G Class Ill Div I Source 1 eX GC Source 1 V Sense 1 SO V Sense 1 Y Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections NAIC Ne Thermocouple Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to l Source 2 1 Source 2 Type J K E T R S B chassis ground at the Module end Thermocouple tips Chassis be grounded if required V Sense 2 0 V Sense 2 Ground Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electronically connected to the Module Source 3 10 Source 3 Note 3 Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module V Sense G3 V Sense 3 gt Note 4 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically N C examined in combination as a system when the approved values Source 4 of Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and Source 4 V Sense 4 V Sense 4 the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Source 5 AAE Source 5 safe appar

Quantum with Unity Pro - Maintenance

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents